SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSIONFORM 20-F
ENGLAND(Jurisdictions of incorporation)
54 LOMBARD STREET, LONDON, EC3P 4AH, ENGLAND(Address of principal executive offices)Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None
Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act: None
Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuers classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report.
This document comprises the Annual report on Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2003 of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC (the 2003 Form 20-F). Reference is made to the Form 20-F cross reference table on page 192 hereof (the Form 20-F Cross Reference Table). Only (i) the information in this document that is referenced in the Form 20-F Cross Reference Table, and (ii) the Exhibits, shall be deemed to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission for any purpose, including incorporation by reference into the Registration Statements on Form F-3 (File No. 333-85646, 333-12384 and 333-8054) and the Registration Statements on Form S-8 (File No. 333-12818, 333-112797 and 333-112796), which were filed by Barclays Bank PLC, and any other documents, including any documents filed by Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC pursuant to the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, which purport to incorporate by reference the 2003 Form 20-F. Any information herein which is not referenced in the Form 20-F Cross Reference Table, or such Exhibits themselves, shall not be deemed to be so incorporated by reference.
This document contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended and section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to certain of the Groups plans and its current goals and expectations relating to its future financial condition and performance. The Group may also make forward-looking statements in other written materials, including other documents filed with or furnished to the SEC. In addition, the Groups senior management may make forward-looking statements orally to analysts, investors, representatives of the media and others. In particular, among other statements, certain statements in the Financial Review and Business Description with regard to management objectives, trends in results of operations, margins, costs, return on equity, risk management, and competition are forward looking in nature. These forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical or current facts. Forward-looking statements often use words such as anticipate, target, expect, estimate, intend, plan, goal, believe, or other words of similar meaning. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend on circumstances that will occur in the future. The Groups actual future results may differ materially from those set out in the Groups forward-looking statements. There are many factors that could cause actual results and developments to differ materially from those expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. Any forward-looking statements made by or on behalf of the Group speak only as of the date they are made. Barclays does not undertake to update forward-looking statements to reflect any changes in the Groups expectations with regard thereto or any changes in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statement is based. The reader should, however, consult any additional disclosures Barclays may make in documents it files with the SEC.
Section 1Impact
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 1
Directors and Officers
Directors and Officers of Barclays PLCand Barclays Bank PLC
1 Sir Peter Middleton, GCB, ChairmanSir Peter Middleton GCB (age 69) was appointed as Chairman at the 1999 Annual General Meeting. Sir Peter joined the Board in 1991 as Deputy Chairman and Chairman of BZW. This followed a long career in HM Treasury where he was Permanent Secretary from 1983 to 1991. He became Chairman of Barclays Capital following the reorganisation of BZW in 1997. In 1998, he relinquished his executive responsibilities as Deputy Chairman and Chairman of Barclays Capital but remained a non-executive Director. He is Deputy Chairman of United Utilities PLC, Chancellor of Sheffield University and Chairman of the Board Nominations and Board Risk Committees.
2 Thomas David Guy Arculus(a)Thomas David Guy Arculus (age 57) joined the Board in 1997. He is Chairman of Severn Trent plc, Earls Court and Olympia Group Limited and the UK Governments Better Regulation Task Force. He is also a non-executive Director of mmO2 plc and a delegate of Oxford University Press. His previous positions include Chairman of IPC Group Limited and Group Managing Director of EMAP plc. He is a member of the Board Remuneration and Board Nominations Committees.
3 Sir Richard Broadbent(a)Sir Richard Broadbent (age 50) joined the Board on 1st September 2003. He had previously been the Executive Chairman of HM Customs and Excise from 2000 to 2003. He was formerly a member of the Group Executive Committee of Schroders plc and a non-executive Director of the Securities Institute.
4 Hilary Mary Cropper, CBE(a)Hilary Mary Cropper CBE (age 63) joined the Board in 1998. She is Honorary President of Xansa PLC, where she was, until recently, the Chairman. Xansa is a leading supplier of business enabling technology services. Mrs Cropper is also an external adviser to the Home Civil Service Senior Appointments Selection Committee and a member of the Governments National Employment Panel. She is a member of the Board Risk Committee.
5 Professor Dame Sandra June Noble Dawson(a)Professor Dame Sandra June Noble Dawson (age 57) joined the Board in March 2003. She is currently KPMG Professor of Management Studies at the University of Cambridge, and has been Director of the Judge Institute at Cambridge since 1995, and Master of Sidney Sussex College, Cambridge since 1999. Professor Dawson has held a range of non-executive posts in organisations including Rand Europe (UK), the Society for the Advancement of Management Studies, JP Morgan Fleming Claverhouse Investment Trust, and Riverside Mental Health Trust. She was also a member of the Senior Salaries Review Board. She is a member of the Board Audit Committee.
6 Sir Brian Garton Jenkins, GBE(a), Deputy ChairmanSir Brian Garton Jenkins GBE (age 68) joined the Board in 2000 as a Deputy Chairman on completion of the acquisition of Woolwich plc. He joined the Woolwich Board as a non-executive Director in 1994 and was appointed Deputy Chairman in 1995. He became Chairman later that year and oversaw the conversion of The Woolwich Building Society to a public limited company in 1997. Sir Brian is a former senior partner of Coopers & Lybrand Chartered Accountants, has served as Lord Mayor of London, President of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England & Wales and as President of the British Computer Society. He is President of the Charities Aid Foundation and a member of the Board Audit, Board Remuneration, Board Nominations and Board Risk Committees.
7 Sir Nigel Rudd, DL(a)Sir Nigel Rudd DL (age 57) joined the Board in 1996. Sir Nigel is non-executive Chairman of Pilkington PLC, Pendragon PLC and Boots PLC. He recently retired as Chairman of Kidde PLC. He is Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee and a member of the Board Nominations Committee.
2
8 Stephen George Russell(a)Stephen George Russell (age 58) joined the Board in 2000 on completion of the acquisition of Woolwich plc. He joined Woolwich plcs Board as a non-executive Director in 1998. He was previously Chief Executive of Boots PLC from 2000 until 2003. He is Chairman of the Board Audit Committee and a member of the Board Risk Committee.
9 Dr Jürgen Zech(a)Dr Jürgen Zech (age 64) joined the Board as a non-executive Director in July 2002. Dr Zech retired as Chief Executive of Gerling-Konzern, the general insurance arm of Gerling at the end of 2001. He is a non-executive Director of Misys PLC and Partner, Re Limited. He is a member of the Board Audit Committee.
10 Matthew William Barrett(b)(c), Group Chief ExecutiveMatthew William Barrett (age 59) was appointed as Group Chief Executive and joined the Board in 1999 and will succeed Sir Peter Middleton as Chairman on 1st January 2005. He joined Barclays from Bank of Montreal where he was Chairman and Chief Executive Officer. He joined the Bank of Montreal in 1962 and during his career held a variety of senior management positions in different areas within the Bank, including Retail Banking, International Banking and Treasury. He was appointed Chief Operating Officer in 1987, Chief Executive Officer in 1989 and elected Chairman of the Board in 1990. In 1994, he became an Officer of the Order of Canada, the countrys highest civilian honour, and in 1995, he was awarded the title of Canadas Outstanding CEO of the Year. He is a non-executive Director of the Molson Companies Limited and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York.
11 John Silvester Varley(b)(c), Group Deputy Chief ExecutiveJohn Silvester Varley (age 47) was appointed as Group Deputy Chief Executive on 1st January 2004 and will succeed Matthew Barrett as Group Chief Executive on 1st January 2005. He had previously held the position of Group Finance Director since 2000. He joined the Group Executive Committee in September 1996 and was appointed to the Board in 1998. Mr Varley was previously Chief Executive of Retail Financial Services from 1998 to 2000 and was Chairman of the Asset Management Division from 1995.
12 Roger William John Davis(b)(c), Chief Executive, UK BankingRoger William John Davis (age 47) was appointed as Chief Executive of UK Banking on 1st January 2004 and joined the Board on the same date. Mr Davis previous roles for the Group include: Chief Executive of Business Banking; Chairman and Chief Executive of Barclays Capital, Asia Pacific and was a member of the Barclays Capital Executive Committee. He joined the Group Executive Committee in February 2003. Before joining Barclays, he spent 12 years in the British Army and began his City career at Robert Fleming & Co where he was a member of the Board of Jardine Fleming Holdings and Managing Director of Jardine Fleming India.
13 Robert Edward Diamond Jr(c), Chief Executive, Wholesale and InstitutionalRobert Edward Diamond Jr (age 52) was appointed to the role on 1st January 2004 and is also Chief Executive, Barclays Capital and Chairman, Barclays Global Investors. He joined Barclays in July 1996 from CSFB where he was Vice-Chairman and Head of Global Fixed Income and Foreign Exchange. He was appointed to the Group Executive Committee in September 1997.
14 Gary Stewart Dibb(c), Group Chief Administrative OfficerGary Stewart Dibb (age 53) joined Barclays from Bank of Montreal in 2000. He is responsible for Human Resources, Communications, Marketing, Strategy and Planning, Public Policy and Group Property Services as well as the implementation of Value Based Management. He joined the Group Executive Committee in February 2000.
15 Gary Andrew Hoffman(b)(c), Chief Executive, BarclaycardGary Andrew Hoffman (age 43) was appointed as Chief Executive of Barclaycard in September 2001 and joined the Board on 1st January 2004. Gary joined the Group in 1983 and has held a variety of management positions, as well as sitting on the Executive Committee of Retail Financial Services and being a member of the Group Operating Committee. He joined the Group Executive Committee in 2001.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 3
16 Naguib Kheraj(b)(c), Group Finance DirectorNaguib Kheraj (age 39) was appointed as Group Finance Director and joined the Board on 1st January 2004. Mr Kheraj had previously held the positions of Chief Executive of Barclays Private Clients, Deputy Chairman of Barclays Global Investors, Global Head of Investment Banking and Global Chief Operating Officer at Barclays Capital. He joined the Group Executive Committee in March 2003. Before joining Barclays, Mr Kheraj held the post of Chief Financial Officer for Europe at Salomon Brothers.
17 Christopher John Lendrum(b)(c), Vice-ChairmanChristopher John Lendrum (age 57) was appointed Vice-Chairman of Barclays Bank PLC on 1st January 2004 after 35 years with the Barclays Group. He was appointed to the Board in 1998 and was appointed to the Group Executive Committee in 1996. His range of responsibilities includes overseeing Barclays strategy and policy in the area of corporate social responsibility and accountability for governance and control throughout Africa and the Asia Pacific Region. He is Chairman of Barclays Africa and a Director and Trustee of the Banks Pension Fund. Mr Lendrum has previously occupied a succession of roles including Chief Executive, Corporate Banking and Executive Vice-President, Barclays Bank of New York.
18 Robert William James Nimmo(c), Group Risk DirectorRobert William James Nimmo (age 56) joined Barclays in January 2002. He began his career at Citibank in 1969 and most recently he served as Chief Risk Officer at First Union Corporation. He joined the Group Executive Committee in January 2002.
19 David Lawton Roberts(b)(c), Chief Executive, Private Clients & InternationalDavid Lawton Roberts (age 41) was appointed as Chief Executive of Private Clients & International on 1st January 2004 and joined the Board on the same date. Mr Roberts joined the Group in 1983 and has held various management positions, including Chief Executive of Personal Financial Services and Chief Executive of Business Banking. He joined the Group Executive Committee in 2001.
20 David Avery Weymouth(c), Chief Information OfficerDavid Avery Weymouth (age 48) joined Barclays in 1977 and was appointed Chief Information Officer in February 2000. He joined the Group Executive Committee in February 2000. He had previously held other management positions including Managing Director, Service Provision for Retail and Corporate Banking and Chief Operating Officer, Corporate Banking.
4
Directors Report
Profit AttributableThe profit attributable to shareholders for the year amounted to £2,744m, compared with £2,230m in 2002.
DividendsThe final dividends for the year ended 31st December 2003 of 13.45p per ordinary share of 25p each and 10p per staff share of £1 each have been approved by the Directors. The final dividends will be paid on 30th April 2004 in respect of the ordinary shares registered at the close of business on 27th February 2004 and in respect of the staff shares so registered on 31st December 2003. With the interim dividend of 7.05p per ordinary share and of 10p per staff share that were paid on 1st October 2003, the total distribution for 2003 is 20.50p (2002: 18.35p) per ordinary share and 20p (2002: 20p) per staff share. The dividends for the year absorb a total of £1,340m (2002: £1,206m).
Dividend Reinvestment PlanOrdinary shareholders may have their dividends reinvested in Barclays PLC ordinary shares by participating in the Dividend Reinvestment Plan. The Plan is available to all ordinary shareholders provided that they do not live in, or are subject to the jurisdiction of, any country where their participation in the Plan would require Barclays or The Plan Administrator to take action to comply with local government or regulatory procedures or any similar formalities. Any shareholder wishing to obtain details of the Plan and a mandate form should contact The Plan Administrator to Barclays at The Causeway, Worthing, BN99 6DA. Those wishing to participate for the first time in the Plan should send their completed mandate form to The Plan Administrator so as to be received by 7th April 2004 for it to be applicable to the payment of the final dividend on 30th April 2004. Existing participants should take no action unless they wish to alter their current mandate instructions, in which case they should contact The Plan Administrator.
Share CapitalDuring the year, Barclays PLC purchased in the market for cancellation 49.4 million of its ordinary shares of 25p at a total cost of £204m as part of its programme of returning excess capital to shareholders. These transactions represented some 0.75% of the issued ordinary share capital at 31st December 2003. As at 11th February 2004, the Company has an unexpired authority to repurchase further shares up to a maximum of 963.1 million ordinary shares of 25p.
The ordinary share capital was increased by 36.6 million ordinary shares during the year as a result of the exercise of options under the SAYE and Executive Share Option Schemes. At 31st December 2003 the issued ordinary share capital totalled 6,563 million shares.
Substantial ShareholdingsAs at 11th February 2004, the Company has not been notified of any major interests in its shares as required by sections 198 to 208 of the Companies Act 1985.
Board MembershipThe membership of the Boards of Directors of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC is identical and biographical details of the current members are set out on pages 2 to 4. Professor Dame Sandra Dawson and Sir Richard Broadbent were appointed as non-executive Directors on 1st March 2003 and 1st September 2003, respectively. Roger Davis, Gary Hoffman, Naguib Kheraj and David Roberts were appointed as executive Directors with effect from 1st January 2004. John Stewart and Graham Wallace resigned from the Board on 27th February 2003 and 2nd April 2003, respectively. Sir Nigel Mobbs retired from the Board on 24th April 2003.
Retirement and Re-election of DirectorsIn accordance with its Articles of Association, one-third (rounded down) of the Directors of Barclays PLC are required to retire by rotation at each AGM, together with Directors appointed by the Board since the last AGM. The retiring Directors are eligible to stand for re-election. In addition, under the UK Combined Code of Corporate Governance, every Director should seek re-election by shareholders every three years.
The Directors retiring by rotation at the 2004 AGM and offering themselves for re-election are Sir Peter Middleton, Stephen Russell and Chris Lendrum. Sir Richard Broadbent, Roger Davis, Gary Hoffman, Naguib Kheraj and also David Roberts, who were appointed as Directors since the last AGM, will also be offering themselves for re-election at the 2004 AGM. Sir Brian Jenkins, who was last re-elected by shareholders at the 2001 AGM will also be retiring and seeking re-election in accordance with the UK Combined Code.
Directors InterestsDirectors interests in the shares of the Group on 31st December 2003, according to the register maintained under the Companies Act 1985, are shown on page 22. The register is available for inspection during business hours at the Groups Head office and will be available for inspection at the 2004 AGM.
Directors Emoluments and OptionsInformation on emoluments and share options of Directors of Barclays PLC, in accordance with the Companies Act 1985 and the Listing Rules of the United Kingdom Listing Authority, is given in the Corporate Governance Report by the Board on pages 15 to 22 and in Notes 55 and 56 to the accounts.
ActivitiesBarclays PLC Group is an international financial services group engaged primarily in banking, investment banking and asset management. The Group operates through branches, offices and subsidiaries in the UK and overseas. The activities of the Group are described on pages 64 to 68 and developments in the Groups business during the year and an indication of likely future developments are analysed in the Risk management section on pages 25 to 59 and the Financial review on pages 70 to 95.
Community InvolvementCommunity support totalled £32.8m (2002: £32.3m).
Barclays invested £29.4m in support of the community in the UK (2002: £30.0m) and £3.4m was invested in international support (2002: £2.3m). UK community support includes £9.9m of charitable donations (2002: £11.1m).
Barclays is a member of the Percent Club a group of companies that undertook to ensure that donations to the community in 2003 amounted to at least 1% of their UK pre-tax profit.
Political DonationsNo political donations were made during the year. At the AGM in 2002 shareholders gave a four-year authority for Barclays Bank PLC and a number of other subsidiaries to make political donations and incur political expenditure up to a maximum aggregate sum of £250,000 per annum as a precautionary measure in light of the wide definitions in The Political Parties, Elections and Referendums Act 2000.
These authorities have not been used and it is not proposed that the Groups long-standing policy of not making contributions to any political party be changed.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 5
Employee InvolvementBarclays is committed to ensuring that employees share in the success of the Company and have the opportunity to share their views and provide feedback on issues which are important to them.
EqualityBarclays is committed to giving full and fair consideration to applications for employment from people with disabilities and to continuing the employment of staff who become disabled and arranging any appropriate training to achieve this.
Health and SafetyBarclays is committed to ensuring the health, safety and welfare of its employees and, as far as is reasonably practicable, to providing and maintaining safe working conditions. This commitment goes beyond just fulfilling its statutory legal obligations; the Bank has a wish to be proactive in its management of health and safety in the workplace, and recognises that this will strengthen both its physical and human resources.
It is also recognised that in addition to its employees, Barclays has responsibilities towards all persons on its premises, such as customers, contractors, visitors and members of the public, and will ensure, as far as is reasonably practicable, that they are not exposed to risks to their health and safety.
The Board receives regular reports on health and safety from the Group Human Resources Director.
Creditors Payment PolicyBarclays policy follows the DTIs Better Payment Practice Code, copies of which can be obtained from the Better Payment Practice Groups website at www.payontime.co.uk. The Code states that a company should have a clear, consistent policy, adhered to by the finance and purchasing departments, that payment terms are agreed at the outset and payment procedures explained to suppliers, that bills are settled in accordance with payment terms agreed with suppliers, that complaints are dealt with quickly and that suppliers are advised of disputes. Barclays values its suppliers and acknowledges the importance of paying invoices, especially those of small businesses, promptly. Normal policy is to pay all small business purchases within 30 days.
Creditor payment days are carefully monitored in the Group, using the systems which record the actual purchases and payments. Barclays estimates that for all UK supplies to Barclays Bank PLC, average creditor payment days in 2003 were 25 days (2002: 31 days). Paragraph 12(3) of Schedule 7 to the Companies Act 1985 requires disclosure of trade creditor payment days. Disclosure is required by the Company, rather than the Group. The Groups principal trading subsidiary in the UK is Barclays Bank PLC, the accounts for which are prepared under Schedule 9 of the Companies Act 1985. The components for the trade creditor calculation are not easily identified in Schedule 9. However, by identifying as closely as possible the components required by the Schedule, the trade creditor payment days for Barclays Bank PLC for 2003 were 35 days (2002: 28 days). This is an arithmetical calculation which includes property rentals and payments, and does not necessarily reflect our practice, which is described above, nor the experience of any individual creditor.
The AuditorsPricewaterhouseCoopers LLP have signified their willingness to continue in office and ordinary resolutions reappointing them as auditors and authorising the Directors to determine their remuneration will be proposed at the 2004 AGM. The Board Audit Committee approves and reviews the appointment of the external auditors, as well as their relationship with the Group, including monitoring the balance of audit and non-audit fees paid to the auditors. More details on this can be found on page 9 and Note 5 to the accounts.
The Annual General MeetingThe AGM will be held at The Queen Elizabeth II Conference Centre on Thursday 29th April 2004. The Notice of Annual General Meeting is included in the Annual Review and Summary Financial Statement 2003 sent to shareholders with this report.
By order of the BoardLawrence DickinsonGroup Secretary11th February 2004
6
Corporate GovernanceCorporate Governance Report
2003 Corporate Governance Report
Chairmans StatementAt Barclays, we are committed to having robust corporate governance practices in place and applying the highest standards of business integrity in all of our activities.
2003 has been another year in which corporate governance has been the focal point of public and regulatory attention. In July we saw the publication in the UK of the revised Combined Code on Corporate Governance, the culmination of the various reviews that took place in 2002 and 2003, including the Higgs and Smith Reports. While Barclays will only be required to report on compliance with the revised Combined Code in respect of the 2004 financial year onwards, we are making every effort to comply with it as quickly as possible.
Our commitment to complying with the revised Code was exemplified by our approach to the communication of our succession plans in October 2003. The Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee, Sir Nigel Rudd, led the non-executive Directors in seeking my replacement as Chairman. I am pleased we have found the right candidate in Matthew Barrett.
I wrote to all shareholders on 6th November 2003 explaining why the Board came to its decision to appoint Mr Barrett as Chairman. The Boards decision to appoint Mr Barrett followed an extensive and rigorous process involving all the non-executive Directors. The process involved establishing the desirable characteristics for a new Chairman and reviewing external candidates, identified with the help of specialist recruitment consultants, and their availability. Mr Barrett was the Boards unanimous choice. The Board does not regard his appointment as setting a precedent in Barclays for appointing the Group Chief Executive to the position of Chairman.
Mr Barretts appointment helps ensure stability within the senior leadership team at a time of considerable change when a number of senior managers have been given revised and broader responsibilities. The Board also felt that Mr Barrett was the right person for the job given the need to continue to implement our strategy, which has been shown to be successful and value-creating for shareholders; Barclays financial results in 2003 were very strong. The Board was also conscious that Mr Barrett has only been with Barclays for four years and was keen to ensure we obtained maximum value from his contribution, given the success Barclays has enjoyed under his leadership.
The Board thus considered that this particular combination of considerations at this particular time meant that Mr Barretts appointment was in the best interests of shareholders.
The letter is reproduced in full below:
Dear Shareholder
Chairman of Barclays PLCOn 9th October 2003, Barclays announced a number of changes to the Board and to senior management. The announcement said: Sir Peter Middleton, Chairman of the Board of Barclays PLC, will serve until 31st December 2004, at which time Matthew W. Barrett will succeed him. Mr Barrett will be succeeded by John Varley as Group Chief Executive.
The Combined Code on Corporate GovernanceThe new Combined Code on Corporate Governance will apply for reporting years beginning on or after 1st November 2003. The Code will require an explanation in cases where an individual who previously was a Chief Executive Officer of a company is appointed Chairman of the Board. In Barclays case, this will be included in the Report and Accounts for 2003. However, I am writing to you today on behalf of the Board to provide an early explanation of our decision.
BackgroundMr Barrett has been Group Chief Executive of Barclays PLC for four years having joined the Group in October 1999. During this time the strategy that has been put in place has produced strong results. Barclays is in the top quartile of its peers worldwide in terms of total shareholder return. It has performed significantly better than the average of FTSE 100 companies. In terms of market capitalisation, it is now a top ten bank globally. It has developed a powerful, cohesive management style and a strong control culture. Senior leaders have developed to the point where the Board had a wide choice of internal candidates to succeed Mr Barrett as Group Chief Executive.
The announcements of the new Chairman and Group Chief Executive were made well in advance so that the Group could ensure a smooth transition to both roles and implement the new organisation structure which was announced at the same time.
ProcessThe Board has conducted a thorough selection process. In the case of the Chairman, both external and internal candidates were considered. The Nominations Committee was, for this purpose, chaired by Sir Nigel Rudd. However, all the non-executive Directors, and eventually the whole Board, were involved.
CriteriaIt is the obligation of the Board to appoint as Chairman the individual who, in its opinion, is best qualified to serve shareholders. The Board established a number of desirable characteristics to guide its search for a new Chairman. These included:
It is the Boards intention that the responsibilities of the Chairman and Group Chief Executive will be agreed and set out in writing as they are currently for myself and Mr Barrett. They will be consistent with both the existing roles and the best practice guidelines on the role of the Chairman attached to the new Combined Code.
Reasons for the Boards DecisionMr Barrett emerged as the Boards unanimous choice, ahead of all other candidates, for the following reasons:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 7
Senior Independent DirectorThe Board intends to appoint a Senior Independent non-executive Director in line with the new Combined Code during 2004.
Terms and ConditionsMr Barretts terms and conditions, including his remuneration, will be settled nearer to the time of his appointment and will be appropriate to the role of Chairman.
ConsultationWe have kept major shareholders informed of the Barclays Boards developing thinking on succession issues, in line with the recommendations contained in the new Combined Code but I wanted to write to shareholders personally to explain how we have arrived at this important decision.
In conclusion, the Board is not complacent on Corporate Governance. As you will see in the following pages, the Board and its Committees have made continued strides to show Barclays as an exemplary organisation in the field of corporate governance. The Group will continue to play an active role in the ongoing debate on the development of corporate governance best practice, promoting greater openness and transparency rather than prescriptive regulation.
Sir Peter MiddletonChairman
Board StructureThe Board consists of the Chairman, who has no executive responsibilities, eight non-executive Directors (all of whom are considered to be independent by the Board) and seven executive Directors, including the Group Chief Executive. Their biographical details are set out on pages 2 to 4. The roles and responsibilities of our Chairman and Group Chief Executive have been approved by the whole Board, and their roles are separate, well documented and understood. A summary of the relevant role is attached to each executive Directors service contract. All service contracts are available for inspection during office hours, on request, addressed to the Group Secretary.
Under the leadership of the Group Chief Executive, executive management is responsible to the Board for the implementation of the strategy and policies approved by the Board, making and implementing operational decisions and running the Groups businesses. Non-executive Directors, based on their breadth of knowledge and experience, challenge, monitor and approve the strategy and policies recommended by the executive.
In the 2002 Annual Report, we disclosed how we had adopted a formal system of annually evaluating the Board. During 2003, we have expanded the assessment process by requiring the Board Audit Committee to complete a similar questionnaire tailored to that Committees function. A tailored questionnaire has been or will be sent to all of the other principal Board Committees during 2004 and then on an annual basis. The results of these assessments will be reported back to the Board, making recommendations for change. It is the responsibility of the Chairman to lead the non-executives in assessing the performance of the Group Chief Executive. The Board Remuneration Committee evaluates the performance of the Chairman. The Chairman also meets annually with each of the non-executives to discuss their performance as Directors during the year.
The Board meets regularly and has a formal schedule of matters reserved to it. All Directors have access to the services of the Group Secretary and his team. Independent professional advice is also available to all Directors at the Companys expense upon request.
Meetings of the Board are structured to allow and encourage open discussion and frank debate to ensure that non-executive Directors provide effective challenge to the executive. The Chairman meets privately with the non-executives prior to each Board meeting to brief non-executive Directors and to address any concerns they may have. In 2004, there will also be a meeting of the non-executive Directors without the Chairman being present, to meet the requirements of the revised Combined Code.
On appointment, non-executive Directors receive a comprehensive induction, including site visits and meetings with senior management, across the businesses and the Group Functions, to help them to build up quickly a detailed understanding of the Group. Where appropriate, additional training and updates on particular issues are arranged by the Group Secretary.
At each AGM, one-third of the Directors (rounded down) retire and offer themselves for re-election. In practice, this means that every Director stands for re-election at least once every three years. Any Directors appointed by the Board since the last AGM, or Directors who reach the age of 70, must also stand for re-election at the next AGM.
Our Directors diligently support the work of the Board and its Committees. During the year, eleven Board meetings were held which included a two-day meeting on the Groups European operations and a full day spent reviewing the Groups strategy. The attendance of individual Directors at Board meetings during 2003 is shown in the table below:
8
Combined Code Statement of ComplianceAs a Company listed on the official list of the London Stock Exchange, Barclays is required to state how it has applied the principles in the United Kingdom Listing Authoritys Combined Code on Corporate Governance or, where these have not been applied, to provide an explanation accordingly.
For the year ended 31st December 2003, Barclays complied with the existing Combined Code save for the formal appointment of a Senior Independent Director. As set out in our letter to shareholders on 6th November 2003, making such an appointment is a priority for the Board during 2004. However, the Group has in Sir Brian Jenkins a Deputy Chairman and independent non-executive Director who is available as a point of contact for shareholders if required.
The Board annually reviews the independence of its non-executive Directors, taking into account developing best practice and regulation. For 2003, the Board has determined that all the non-executive Directors are independent under the existing Combined Code and after taking into account all the independence factors outlined in the revised Combined Code. There is a strategic alliance between Barclaycard and Xansa, of which Hilary Cropper was, until recently, Chairman. Mrs Cropper has not, and will not, participate in discussions relating to this alliance at Barclays Board meetings. Mrs Cropper also refrained from discussing and voting on the alliance at meetings of the Xansa Board. Mrs Cropper is no longer a Director of Xansa although she is now Honorary President. Having considered the matter carefully, the Board has concluded that Hilary Cropper remains independent for these purposes under the existing and the revised Combined Codes and demonstrates her independence at every Board meeting.
Although the standards in the revised Combined Code will only apply to the Group from the 2004 financial year, Barclays has used its best endeavours to comply with it so far as possible. The Boards view is that the Group already complies with the principles set out in the revised Code. However, work will be done in the coming year to ensure compliance with the specific provisions, principally the appointment of a senior independent non-executive Director and a non-executive Director with recent and relevant financial experience to serve on the Board Audit Committee.
Board CommitteesSpecific responsibilities have been delegated to Board committees. All Board Committees have access to independent expert advice at the Groups expense and, as explained above, are or will be subject to an annual self-assessment, the results of which are or will be reported to the Board. The terms of reference for the principal Board committees are also available on request from the Group Secretary. The four principal Board committees are:
Board Audit CommitteeChairmans StatementThe Board Audit Committee has continued to play an important role in reviewing the Groups controls and financial reporting systems. Its role is becoming increasingly complex and high profile given the focus on the work of audit committees over the last two years. Barclays is fully committed to ensuring its Board Audit Committee fulfils its new duties and responsibilities effectively.
The Committee is made up entirely of independent non-executive Directors. While the Committee has collectively the skills and experience required to fully discharge its duties, and has access to independent expert advice at the Groups expense, the Board has determined that no
single member is a financial expert, as defined by the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002, or fully meets the requirements of the revised Combined Code in respect of recent and relevant financial experience. The appointment to the Board and to the Board Audit Committee of an individual who meets both tests is a priority for the Board in 2004. However, Sir Brian Jenkins, a member of the Committee, is a chartered accountant and an ex-senior partner of Coopers & Lybrand.
Members of the Committee during 2003, together with a record of their attendance at Committee meetings, are set out below:
During 2003, the Committee has met five times, with the Groups senior management, the internal audit team and the external auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP. In preparing for each of these meetings I also held discussions with each of them to ensure that the meetings of the Committee were as effective as possible. The Committee also met privately with the external and internal auditors after each Committee meeting and at other times, where appropriate.
The Committee is responsible for approving and reviewing the appointment and retirement of the external auditors, as well as overseeing their relationship with the Group. This includes conducting an annual review of the independence and effectiveness of the external auditors and the recommendation to the Board as to the level of fees to be paid to the external auditors.
During the course of the year, the Committee reviewed and approved a comprehensive and robust policy to regulate the Groups use of the external auditors for non-audit services. The policy sets out in detail what services may or may not be provided to the Group by the external auditors. The Committee must approve individual assignments which are not pre-approved or which exceed a certain value and sets aside time at each Committee meeting to discuss the external auditors independence, the level of non-audit fees being paid to them and the types of services being provided by them, including a summary of all assignments preapproved since the last meeting. In addition, the Committee has approved a Code of Ethics applicable to the Group Chief Executive and the Groups senior financial officers.
The responsibility for ensuring that management maintain an effective system of internal control and for reviewing its effectiveness rests with the Board. The Group Chief Executive and the Group Executive Committee is responsible for the management of risk and the Group Governance and Control Committee is responsible for monitoring the Groups assurance process and the risk governance framework to ensure that it is complete and effective. The Board Audit Committee reviews the effectiveness of risk management standards and reviews reports on control issues of Group level significance.
The Committee has a pivotal role in reviewing the Groups annual and interim financial statements, including the effectiveness of the Groups disclosure controls and procedures and systems of internal control. The remit of the Committee also extends to reviewing the work undertaken by the internal audit team and reports produced by senior management on control issues, reporting its findings to the Board as appropriate.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 9
The Committee reviews arrangements established by management for compliance with the requirements of the Groups regulators and receives reports on the effectiveness of the Groups whistleblowing arrangements as well as reports on specific instances of whistleblowing. This year, the Committee has also reviewed a report on the implementation of International Financial Reporting Standards.
The Committee strives to ensure that it keeps abreast of all material developments in regulation and best practice affecting the work within its remit. The Committee has in place procedures to ensure that it receives regular briefings on such issues as well as training, where appropriate.
Stephen RussellBoard Audit Committee Chairman
Board Remuneration CommitteeThe members of the Committee during 2003, together with a record of their attendance at Committee meetings, are set out below:
The Board Remuneration Committee meets at least four times a year to consider matters relating to executive remuneration including policy for executive Directors and senior executives remuneration, including bonus payments. The Committee also meets to approve changes to employee benefits schemes and long-term incentive schemes. Further details of the work of the Committee are set out in Barclays Report on Remuneration on pages 11 to 22.
Board Nominations CommitteeThe members of the Committee during 2003, together with a record of their attendance at Committee meetings, are set out below:
The Board Nominations Committee meets formally at least once a year to consider matters relating to the composition of the Board, the appointment of new Directors (making recommendations to the Board as appropriate) and succession planning for senior management positions. The Committee is chaired by the Chairman of the Board, except when the Committee is considering the succession of the Chairman, in which case the Committee is chaired by Sir Nigel Rudd. During the course of the year, Sir Nigel led the search for Sir Peter Middletons successor. Due to the importance that the Board placed on the succession, the decision was made to invite all non-executive Directors to additional meetings which considered the Chairmans and Group Chief Executives succession rather than just the Committee members set out above. In addition to the meetings described above, the non-executive Directors met prior to Board meetings and throughout the year to review both the Chair and the Group Chief Executive succession arrangements. New non-executive Director appointments were also considered at these meetings with support provided by external search consultants.
Board Risk CommitteeThe members of the Committee during 2003, together with a record of their attendance at Committee meetings, are set out below:
The Board Risk Committee meets at least four times a year to approve and, together with the Group Governance and Control Committee, review on an annual basis the Groups Governance Principles. These principles flow from the Groups belief that best practice governance, controls and compliance are essential for maximising shareholder value, the Groups governing objective. The Committee also approves Standards for the Groups risk control framework, including appropriate risk identification and measurement processes and efficient control mechanisms, delegating authority to the Director of Group Risk to approve minor revisions to the Standards in between meetings of the Committee.
As well as agreeing the overall risk appetite and risk profile for the Group, the Committee receives and reviews reports that assess the nature and extent of risks facing the Group, including Executive Managements assessments of:
The Committee is also responsible for approving certain policy statements required by the Financial Services Authority. An overview of the Groups risk management and control framework can be found on page 25.
Relations with ShareholdersBarclays has a proactive approach to its institutional and private shareholders, totalling around 877,000. In the UK, senior executives hold meetings with our key institutional shareholders to discuss strategy, financial performance and investment activities. Throughout Europe and in the US, we arrange road shows about the Group for key investors. In addition, the Chairman meets regularly with investor bodies and investors to discuss the Groups approach to corporate governance issues.
The Group aims to provide a first class service to private shareholders to help them in the effective and efficient management of their shareholding in Barclays. Last year we described the introduction of Barclays e-view, the service that enables shareholders to receive shareholder documents electronically. It also gives shareholders immediate access to information relating to their personal shareholding and dividend history. Following the change of Share Registrar in November 2003 to Lloyds TSB Registrars, e-view is now a more comprehensive service and participants can now change their details and dividend mandates online. In addition, dividend tax vouchers are now available online for e-view members.
Our policy is to make constructive use of the AGM. All Directors and, in particular, the chairmen of the Board Audit and Board Remuneration committees and those Directors standing for re-election, are encouraged to attend the AGM and to be available to answer shareholders questions. Normally, all resolutions are voted on a poll to ensure that the views of all shareholders are reflected proportionately.
10
Corporate GovernanceBarclays Report on Remuneration
Barclays Report on Remuneration
Statement from the Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee (the Committee)The primary purpose of the Committee is to determine the Groups policy on the remuneration of executive Directors and their specific remuneration packages. The Committee is made up exclusively of non-executive Directors.
This report describes the current components of the remuneration policy and details the remuneration for each person who served as a Director during 2003.
Barclays emphasis on reward for performance, and alignment with shareholders interests, is illustrated by the following points:
The Committee unanimously recommend that you vote in favour of this report at the AGM.
Sir Nigel RuddBoard Remuneration Committee Chairman
Board Remuneration Committee MembersThe Committee comprised the following independent non-executive Directors:
The Committee members are independent of management and free from any business or other relationship which could materially affect the exercise of their independent judgement.
The constitution and operation of the Committee comply with the Best Practice Provisions on Directors Remuneration in the Combined Code adopted by the UK Listing Authority.
Advisers to the CommitteeThe Committee has access to executive remuneration consultants to ensure that it receives the best independent advice. The selection of advisers is entirely at the discretion of the Committee Chairman. Advisers are appointed by the Committee for specific pieces of work, as necessary, and are required to disclose any potential conflict of interest to the Committee.
Towers Perrin and Mercer2 advised the Committee on latest developments in market compensation. Both companies have advised the Company on other human resource related issues including advice in such areas as employee reward, pensions and employee communication. In addition, Towers Perrin gave actuarial and other advice to the Barclays UK life assurance companies.
The Chairman of the Board, Group Chief Executive and Group Human Resources Director also advise the Committee, but are not permitted to participate in discussions or decisions relating to their own remuneration. The Group Human Resources Director is responsible for personnel within Barclays, is not a Board Director, and is not appointed by the Committee.
Our Remuneration PolicyWe are committed to using reward to support a performance-oriented culture. Executive Directors can expect outstanding reward if performance is outstanding. This philosophy applies to reward policies and practices for all employees in the Group. The Committee considers reward levels across the Group when determining remuneration for executive Directors.
The remuneration policy is:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 11
Barclays reward programmes are designed to support and facilitate generation of TSR. The graph below shows the TSR for the FTSE 100 Index and Barclays since 31st December 1998. The FTSE 100 is the index of the hundred largest UK quoted companies by market capitalisation. It is a widely recognised performance comparison for large UK companies. It shows that, by the end of 2003, a hypothetical £100 invested in Barclays on 31st December 1998 would have generated a total return of £82, compared with a loss of £13 if invested in the FTSE 100 Index. Barclays therefore significantly outperformed the FTSE 100 for this period.
Total Shareholder Return
The Reward Package for Executive DirectorsThe reward package for the executive Directors and other senior executives comprises:
The Committee reviews the elements of the reward package relative to the practice of other comparable organisations.
The sections that follow explain how each of the elements of remuneration listed above is structured. Each part of the package is important and has a specific role in achieving the aims of the remuneration policy. The combined potential earnings from bonus and ISOP outweigh the other elements, and are subject to performance conditions, thereby placing a large proportion of total reward at risk. The component parts for each Director are detailed in tables accompanying this Report.
Base SalaryThis is a fixed cash sum, payable monthly. The Committee reviews salaries each year as part of the total reward package, recognising market levels and individual contribution.
Annual Bonus Including Executive Share Award Scheme (ESAS)The annual bonus for executive Directors is linked to Group economic profit performance and individual performance. Cash bonuses for executive Directors who were on the Board during 2003 were 174% of base salary at 31st December 2003 for the Group Chief Executive, and between 90% and 103% of base salary for the other executive Directors. Up to 75% of any bonus award is normally paid as cash and the balance as a mandatory award of shares under ESAS (see page 18 for details), which must be held for at least three years.
Incentive Share Option Plan (ISOP)The ISOP is designed to provide the opportunity for individuals to receive rewards for creating sustained shareholder value growth. Participants are granted options over Barclays PLC ordinary shares, which are normally exercisable after three years at the market price at the time of grant. The number of shares over which options can be exercised depends upon Barclays performance against specific targets. In establishing the performance targets, the Committee has sought to encourage excellent business performance. The two measures of performance used for the 2003 grant were EP growth and relative TSR. These are both good measures of the value created for shareholders. EP is used as a key internal value creation metric.
The Committee agrees a level of ISOP award for each executive Director taking account of market practice for comparable positions and performance. For the 2003 ISOP grant, a proportion of the award for executive Directors was subject to the EP measure and a proportion to the TSR measure.
1. Growth in Economic ProfitThis measure encourages both profitable growth and the efficient use of capital.
If cumulative EP is above the target range at the end of the three-year performance period, options over double the number of target award shares will become exercisable. If cumulative EP is below the target range at the end of the three-year performance period, options over half of the target award shares will become exercisable. Where EP is below the three-year cumulative EP for the previous three years, the options lapse. This is described, for the 2003 awards, in the following table.
EP ranges for 2003 grant of ISOP for performance period 2003 to 2005(a)
For the 2000 grant of ISOP, which vested during 2003, the outcome of the EP performance condition was above target, which provided a vesting of 2 x target award.
12
2. Total Shareholder ReturnA proportion of the shares under option are subject to a separate performance condition based on TSR measured against a financial services peer group approved by the Committee. This peer group comprises eleven other UK and international financial institutions that have been chosen to reflect Barclays business mix. For the performance period 2003 to 2005, the 2003 peer group is Abbey, ABN Amro, BBVA, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Deutsche Bank, HBOS, HSBC, Lloyds TSB, Royal Bank of Scotland and Standard Chartered.
If Barclays is ranked first, second or third in the peer group, then the options will become exercisable over quadruple, triple or double the target award shares, respectively. If Barclays is ranked fourth, fifth or sixth in the peer group, the options will become exercisable over the target award shares. However, if Barclays is ranked below sixth after three years, there will be a re-test on the fourth anniversary, over the full four-year period. If Barclays is not ranked sixth or higher after four years, the options will lapse.
The method for measuring relative performance is shown in the table that follows, together with the multiple of target award.
For the 2000 grant of ISOP which vested during 2003, Barclays relative TSR performance ranking was third, which provided a vesting of 2 x target award. Therefore, 50% of the options granted, that would have vested had Barclays been ranked first, lapsed.
Options must normally be held for three years before they can be exercised and lapse ten years after grant if not exercised.
SharesaveAll eligible employees including executive Directors have the opportunity to participate in Barclays Sharesave Scheme. Sharesave is an Inland Revenue approved all-employee share plan. The Inland Revenue does not permit performance conditions to be attached to the exercise of options. Under the plan, participants are granted options over Barclays PLC ordinary shares. Each participant may save up to £250 per month to purchase Barclays shares at a discount. For the 2003 grant, the discount was 20% of the market value at the time the option was granted.
Share Incentive PlanThe Share Incentive Plan was introduced in January 2002. It is an Inland Revenue approved all-employee share plan. The plan is open to all eligible UK employees including executive Directors. Under the plan, participants are able to purchase up to £125 worth of Barclays PLC ordinary shares each month, which, if kept in trust for five years, can be withdrawn from the plan tax-free. Any shares in the plan will earn dividends in the form of additional shares, which must normally be held by the trustee for three years before being eligible for release.
PensionsA pension is payable on retirement at contractual retirement date (normally 60), and is calculated either by reference to an executive Directors length of service and pensionable salary or to a money purchase arrangement, depending upon date of hire. Matthew Barrett is not a member of the Groups main pension schemes. A notional fund is accruing on his behalf outside the pension scheme (see page 16 for further details).
Service ContractsThe Group has service contracts with its Chairman, executive Directors and senior executives1. The effective dates of the contracts for the Chairman and executive Directors who served during 2003 are shown in the table below. Non-executive Directors do not have service contracts. The service contracts do not have a fixed term but provide for a notice period from the Group of one year and normally for retirement at age 602. The Committees policy is that executive Directors contracts should allow for termination with contractual notice from the Company, except in circumstances of gross misconduct when notice is not given. The Committees approach when considering payments in the event of termination is to take account of the individual circumstances including the reason for termination, contractual obligations and share scheme rules.
In the Barclays report on remuneration for 2002, we reported that, exceptionally, Mr Barretts contract provided for a pre-determined payment of twice annual remuneration if his contract was terminated following a change of control of Barclays. This provision will be voluntarily removed from Mr Barretts contract with effect from 15th March 2004.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 13
Non-executive DirectorsThe Board determines the fees of non-executive Directors. The Boards policy is that fees should reflect individual responsibilities and membership of Board Committees.
Barclays encourages its non-executive Directors to build up a holding in the Companys shares. £20,000 of their basic Directors fee is used to buy shares in the Company for each non-executive Director. These shares, together with reinvested dividends, are retained on behalf of the non-executive Directors until they retire from the Board. They are included in the table of Directors interests in ordinary shares of Barclays PLC on page 22. Non-executive Directors do not receive awards in share schemes for employees.
For each non-executive Director, the effective date of their letter of appointment, notice period and the Groups liability in the event of early termination are shown in the table below:
Each appointment is for an initial six-year term, renewable for one term of three years thereafter.
Details of non-executive Directors standing for re-election at the 2004 AGM are set out on page 5.
The performance of each non-executive Director is reviewed annually by the Chairman, and at the end of the initial term.
Forward Looking StatementThe Committee will keep the existing remuneration arrangements, as detailed in this Report, under review during 2004 and ensure that Barclays reward programmes remain competitive and provide appropriate incentive for performance. As usual, there will be individual reviews of base salary, annual bonus (including ESAS) and ISOP awards. As we informed shareholders in 2000, Barclays will review the ISOP after five years to consider whether it still meets the Groups business needs.
14
2003 Annual Remuneration(a)
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 15
Executive Directors annual pension accrued assuming retirement at contractual age(e)(f)
16
Current executive Directors: illustration of change in value of shares owned beneficially, or held under option or award under employee share plans during the year(a)
Market price per share at 31st December 2003 was 498p. The highest and lowest market prices per share during the year were 527p and 311p respectively.
Under the Executive Share Award Scheme (ESAS), ISOP and ESOS, nothing was paid by these participants on the grant of options.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 17
Executive Directors: shares provisionally allocated and shares under option under Executive Share Award Scheme (ESAS)(a)
18
Executive Directors: shares under option under Incentive Share Option Plan (ISOP)(a)(b)(f)
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 19
Executive Directors: shares under option under Sharesave(a)(b)
20
Directors: closed Group incentive schemes (Executive Share Option Scheme (ESOS) andWoolwich Executive Share Option Plan (ESOP))
In addition, executive Directors continue to have interests under the ESOS and Woolwich plc 1998 ESOP schemes (as indicated in the table below). No further awards will be made under these schemes. Under the ESOS, options granted (at market value) to executives were exercisable only if the growth in earnings per share of the Company over a three-year period was, at least, equal to the percentage increase in the UK Retail Prices Index plus 6%, over the same period. The performance target for the 1999 ESOS grant was met.
Under the ESOP, options originally granted over Woolwich plc shares at market value were exercised in 2001 or exchanged, in accordance with the proposals made under the Offer to acquire the Woolwich, for options over Barclays PLC shares. Under the rules of ESOP, the performance conditions attached to the exercise of options were disapplied on acquisition of Woolwich plc by Barclays.
Directors: awards under closed Group incentive schemes(a)
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 21
Directors: interests in ordinary shares of Barclays PLC(a)
22
Corporate GovernanceAccountability and Audit
Accountability and Audit
Going ConcernThe Directors confirm they are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to continue in business for the foreseeable future. For this reason, they continue to adopt the going concern basis for preparing the accounts.
Internal ControlThe Directors have responsibility for ensuring that management maintain an effective system of internal control and for reviewing its effectiveness. Such a system is designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives, and can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss. Throughout the year ended 31st December 2003, and to date, the Group has operated a system of internal control which provides reasonable assurance of effective and efficient operations covering all controls, including financial and operational controls and compliance with laws and regulations. Processes are in place for identifying, evaluating and managing the significant risks facing the Group in accordance with the guidance Internal Control: Guidance for Directors on the Combined Code issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales. The Board regularly reviews these processes through the Board Committees.
The Directors review the effectiveness of the system of internal control annually. An internal control compliance certification process is conducted throughout the Group in support of this review. The effectiveness of controls is periodically reviewed within the business areas. Quarterly risk reports are made to the Board covering all risks of Group significance including credit risk, market risk, operational risk, and legal and compliance risk. Regular reports are made to the Board Audit Committee by management, Group Internal Audit and the compliance and legal functions covering particularly financial controls, compliance and operational controls. Reports covering risk measurement standards and risk appetite are made to the Board Risk Committee.
The key document for the Groups internal control processes is the record of Group Governance practices which describes the Groups governance and control framework and details Group policies and processes. The record of Group Governance practices is reviewed and approved on behalf of the Group Chief Executive by the Group Governance and Control Committee. Further details of risk management procedures are given in the Risk management section on pages 25 to 59.
The system of internal financial and operational controls is also subject to regulatory oversight in the United Kingdom and overseas. Further information on supervision by the financial services regulators is provided under Supervision and regulation on pages 96 to 97.
Statement of Directors Responsibilities for AccountsThe following statement, which should be read in conjunction with the Auditors report set out on page 100, is made with a view to distinguishing for shareholders the respective responsibilities of the Directors and of the auditors in relation to the accounts.
The Directors are required by the Companies Act 1985 to prepare accounts for each financial year which give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Company and Group as at the end of the financial year and of the profit or loss for the financial year.
The Directors consider that, in preparing the accounts on pages 101 to 190 and 195 to 202, and the additional information contained on pages 11 to 22, the Group has used appropriate accounting policies, consistently applied and supported by reasonable and prudent
judgements and estimates, and that all accounting standards which they consider to be applicable have been followed.
The Directors have responsibility for ensuring that the Company and the Group keep accounting records which disclose with reasonable accuracy the financial position of the Company and the Group and which enable them to ensure that the accounts comply with the Companies Act 1985.
The Directors have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities.
Signed on behalf of the Board
Sir Peter Middleton11th February 2004
Disclosure Controls and ProceduresThe Group Chief Executive, Matthew Barrett, and the Group Finance Director, Naguib Kheraj, conducted with Group Management an evaluation of the effectiveness of the design and operation of the Groups disclosure controls and procedures as at 31st December 2003, which are defined as those controls and procedures designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in reports filed under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, summarised and reported within specified time periods. As of the date of the evaluation, the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director concluded that the design and operation of these disclosure controls and procedures were effective. No significant changes were made in our internal controls or in other factors that could significantly affect these controls subsequent to their evaluation.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 23
Presentation of Information
Barclays PLC is a public limited company registered in England and Wales under company number 48839. The Company, originally named Barclay & Company Limited, was incorporated in England and Wales on 20th July 1896 under the Companies Acts 1862 to 1890 as a company limited by shares. The company name was changed to Barclays Bank Limited on 17th February 1917 and it was re-registered in 1982 as a public limited company under Companies Acts 1948 to 1980. On 1st January 1985, the company changed its name to Barclays PLC.
Barclays Bank PLC is a public limited company registered in England and Wales under company number 1026167. The Bank was incorporated on 7th August 1925 under the Colonial Bank Act 1925 and on 4th October 1971 was registered as a company limited by shares under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1967. Pursuant to The Barclays Bank Act 1984, on 1st January 1985 the Bank was re-registered as a public limited company and its name was changed from Barclays Bank International Limited to Barclays Bank PLC.
All of the issued ordinary share capital of Barclays Bank PLC is owned by Barclays PLC. The Annual Report for Barclays PLC also contains the consolidated accounts of, and other information relating to, Barclays Bank PLC. The Annual Report includes information required on Form 20-F. Form 20-F will contain as exhibits certificates pursuant to Sections 302 and 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, signed by the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director, with respect to both Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC. Except where otherwise indicated, the information given is identical with respect to both Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC.
The accounts of Barclays Bank PLC included in this document do not comprise statutory accounts within the meaning of Section 240 of the Companies Act 1985. The statutory accounts of Barclays Bank PLC, which contain an unqualified audit report and do not contain any statement under Section 237(2) or (3) of that Act, will be delivered to the Registrar of Companies in accordance with Section 242 of that Act and are published as a separate document.
The term Barclays PLC Group means Barclays PLC together with its subsidiary undertakings and the term Barclays Bank PLC Group means Barclays Bank PLC together with its subsidiary undertakings. Barclays and Group are terms which are used to refer to either of the preceding groups when the subject matter is identical. The term Company refers to Barclays PLC and the term Bank refers to Barclays Bank PLC. Woolwich plc is used, as the context requires, to refer to Woolwich plc and its subsidiary undertakings. In this report, the abbreviations £m and £bn represent millions and thousands of millions of pounds sterling respectively; the abbreviations $m and $bn represent millions and thousands of millions of US dollars respectively and m and bn represent millions and thousands of millions of euros respectively.
Statutory AccountsThe consolidated accounts of Barclays PLC and its subsidiary undertakings are set out on pages 107 to 112 along with the accounts of Barclays PLC itself on page 113. The consolidated accounts of Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiary undertakings are set out on pages 195 to 200. The accounting policies on pages 101 to 106 and the Notes commencing on page 114 apply equally to both sets of accounts unless otherwise stated.
24
Risk Management
Barclays aims to employ superior risk practices to optimise financial performance and value. Our approach to risk management and control continued to evolve in 2003 to reflect best practice. The Group takes risks that are commensurate with the associated returns and within its overall risk appetite.
Risk governance framework
Barclays risk governance framework is based on the following:
During 2003, initiatives were pursued to build on the establishment of the Board Governance Standards (Standards) in 2002. The Standards are high-level articulations of the Boards risk control requirements, covering what are considered to be the principal risks to the achievement of the Groups objectives. Risk reporting to the Board Risk Committee is aligned to the Standards.
The risk governance framework is being aligned with the internationally accepted standard Internal Control Integrated Framework published by the Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission.
Barclays operates in a highly regulated industry and is engaged in responding to significant changes in the regulatory environment, for example, from the implementation of Basel II, International Financial Reporting Standards and the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act. These changes, which directly affect risk management, necessitate considerable resources to amend or re-design our systems and reporting processes. Under Basel II, Barclays aims to achieve advanced status in all risk categories.
Responsibilities for Risk Management and ControlThe responsibilities for risk management and control within the overall governance framework rest with:
Committee OversightThe execution of these responsibilities is guided and monitored by:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 25
Risk ManagementRisk Management and Control Overview
Group Risk Governance Structure
26
Risk ManagementRisk management in the businesses is the responsibility of business management, who are advised and supported by Business Risk Directors who also have a functional reporting line to the Group Risk Director.
The key role of Business Risk Directors and their teams is to assist the businesses to maximise value by:
Specialist risk teams led by Group Risk Type Heads and other risk specialists report to the Group Risk Director.
Their role is to:
Risk Measurement and Economic CapitalThe Group assesses internal capital requirements by using its own risk-based methodologies. These are used in performance assessment and for risk management decision making. The Group computes and assigns this economic capital to all operating units. This enables the Group to apply a common, consistent metric to ensure that returns throughout the Group are commensurate with the associated risks. Economic capital is assigned primarily within the six risk categories summarised below:
Credit Risk The Group estimates the losses expected from its credit portfolio and sets aside appropriate provisions. Capital is required in the event that losses substantially exceed the expected level. The amount is estimated by statistical analysis of the historical loan loss volatility in the various product categories.
Within wholesale and retail businesses, capital allocation is differentiated by segment and customer grade. Off-balance sheet exposures are converted to loan equivalent amounts based on their probability of being drawn, before applying capital factors. See page 29 for further information on credit risk measurement.
Market Risk The required economic capital is primarily based on Daily Value at Risk (DVaR) measurements. Where risks are not measured using DVaR, the capital requirement is based on stress test analysis. Market risk measurement is further discussed on page 48.
Business and Operational Risk A combined economic capital allocation for operational risk and business risk is derived through an equation including variables such as cost base, historic profit volatility and comparable external benchmarks. These risks are discussed on page 58.
Insurance Risk Economic capital is estimated through benchmark analysis of the free asset ratio of similarly rated insurance companies.
Fixed Assets Economic capital is also estimated through benchmark analysis of relevant companies.
Private Equity Economic capital is allocated using an equation based on the amount of equity investment and comparable benchmark capitalisation.
Barclays estimates the correlation between risk types and calculates a diversification benefit which results in a reduction in allocated economic capital for the Group.
The total economic capital required by the Group, as determined by its internal risk assessment models and after considering the Groups estimated diversification benefits, is compared with available common shareholders funds to evaluate overall capital utilisation.
Average economic capital by business and risk type are shown in the following charts and shown by business in the table on page 28.
Average economic capital allocation by business during 2003
Average economic capital allocation by risk type during 2003
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 27
Average economic capital by business
Personal Financial Services economic capital allocation has increased by £300m to £2,400m largely due to continued improvements in methodologies for quantification of credit risk for long maturity assets, previously carried at the Group centre.
Barclays Private Clients economic capital allocation has increased by £150m to £700m due to the acquisitions of Banco Zaragozano and Charles Schwab Europe. The closed life assurance activities economic capital allocation has reduced by £100m to £200m due to the continued run-off of the portfolio and a series of hedges implemented to reduce exposure to equity markets.
Barclaycard economic capital allocation has increased by £300m to £1,800m due to continued growth in the loan book, including the acquisition of Clydesdale Financial Services.
Goodwill has increased with the acquisition of Charles Schwab Europe, Clydesdale Financial Services, Banco Zaragozano and Gerrard.
The Group regularly reviews and updates its economic capital allocation methodologies. A number of enhancements developed during 2003 will be incorporated in 2004.
28
Risk ManagementCredit Risk Management
Credit Risk Management
Credit risk arises because the Groups customers, clients or counterparties may not be able or willing to fulfil their contractual obligations under loan agreements or other credit facilities.
The taking of credit risk is central to our business. At the year end, Barclays had £291,820m (2002: £263,648m) of loans and advances and also other credit risks. The annual credit risk expense of £1,347m (2002: £1,484m) exceeds the risk-taking cost associated with all other risk types combined. Therefore considerable resources, expertise and controls are devoted to managing credit risk.
Credit Risk ControlThe central objective of credit risk management at Barclays is to create shareholder value by ensuring that the net income generated by each exposure individually and in aggregate is commensurate with the risk taken. At Barclays, this is primarily achieved through People and Systems:
People with the skill and experience needed for this task working within the Group Risk Governance Framework.
Systems, including advanced analytics, to measure, monitor and analyse the risk and inform management judgement.
People: Credit Risk Management ResponsibilityBarclays recognises that the taking of credit risk involves judgement, skill and knowledge.
The Groups approach to managing credit risk is consistent with the Governance framework described previously but varies in execution according to the specific nature of the risk in each of the businesses.
In retail businesses, such as Barclaycard and Personal Financial Services, where there are large numbers of customers, a systems driven environment prevails. Credit decisions are made with the aid of statistically based scoring systems. Account management is likewise automated. Both application scoring for new accounts and behavioural scoring for existing relationships are used. These systems measure risk using statistical methodologies derived from the wealth of information and experience Barclays has gained through its relationships with over 14 million customers.
Small business credit risk is managed like consumer accounts using scoring systems. Mid-range business credits are approved and reviewed according to a hierarchy of discretions, under which limits are set according to the skills, experience and seniority of the credit managers and sanctioning teams. They are assisted by analytical models credit grading tools that help to assess the quality of the borrower.
Large value wholesale credits are similarly handled by experienced front-line risk management staff also equipped with analytical tools who work alongside relationship management teams. Decisions must be referred to the Group Credit Committee if the intended exposures exceed specified limits. Besides loans, the credit risks include those arising from money market, foreign exchange, derivative, securities dealing and other products.
In each business, specialist teams deal with impaired credits.
As mentioned in the preceding section, the risk management teams are accountable to the Business Risk Directors in each business who, in turn, report to the head of their business and also to the Group Risk Director.
In addition, Group Credit Risk, led by the Group Credit Risk Director, provides Group-wide direction of credit risk-taking. Group Credit Risk manages resolution of all significant credit policy issues and runs the Group Credit Committee which approves major credit decisions. The Group Credit Risk Director reports to the Group Financial Risk Director, a new role introduced in 2003, who reports to the Group Risk Director. The Group Financial Risk Director has responsibility for both credit and market risk.
Regular reports are provided to the Group Risk Oversight Committee to enable it to discharge its responsibilities.
Systems: Credit Risk Measurement and AnalysisData and analytical tools are integral to risk management. Barclays has been in the forefront of the development and use of advanced credit risk systems. These systems assist the bank in managing credit risk, both in front-line credit decisions on new commitments and in managing the portfolio of existing exposures. They enable the application of consistent risk measurements across all credit exposures, retail and wholesale. The key building blocks, described below, are the probability of customer default (expressed through an internal risk rating), severity, and exposure in the event of default.
Internal risk ratings
Where internal models are used, they are based upon up-to-date account, market and financial information. The models are reviewed regularly to monitor their robustness relative to actual performance and revised as necessary to optimise their effectiveness.
Barclays credit ratings
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 29
SeveritySeverity is the estimated amount of loss expected if a loan defaults, calculated as a percentage of the exposure at the date of default. It recognises that the loss is usually substantially less than the exposure. The value depends on the collateral, if any, seniority or subordination of the exposure, work-out expenses relative to the loan value and other considerations. The outcome is heavily dependent on economic conditions that determine, for example, whether businesses can be refinanced or the prices that can be realised for assets in the event that they are sold.
ExposureExposure in the event of default represents the expected level of usage of the credit facility when default occurs. For example, at default the customer may not have drawn the loan up to the approved limit or may already have repaid some of it. For derivative instruments, exposure in the event of default is the estimated cost of replacing contracts with a positive value if counterparties fail to perform their obligations.
The Group monitors its credit risk on an ongoing basis by applying these measurements across the portfolio both wholesale and retail. It does this by combining the information into a measure called Risk Tendency.
Risk TendencyRisk Tendency is based on the results of a set of model-based calculations, the models having been created using historical data. The models estimate the expected loss arising from loan defaults over the forthcoming 12 months from the current performing loan portfolio, taking into account its current composition, size and risk characteristics. The actual credit provisions can vary significantly around this value, due to changes in the economic environment or the business conditions in specific sectors or countries during the year and from unpredictable or unexpected events. This applies especially in wholesale portfolios where the default of a small number of large exposures can have a significant impact on the outcome.
In addition to enhancing the understanding of the average credit quality of the portfolio, Risk Tendency is one of the measures used by the Group to inform a wider range of decisions, such as establishing the desired aggregate exposure levels to individual sectors and determining pricing policy.
The models used in the Risk Tendency calculation reflect the diversity of the portfolio. They are being improved constantly as the Group collects more data and deploys more sophisticated techniques. The Group believes that each change will have a minor impact on the total result but should lead to better estimates over time.
As shown in the table below, Risk Tendency was £1,390m based upon the composition of the lending portfolio as at 31st December 2003 (31st December 2002: £1,375m). It fell in Personal Financial Services by 8% as a result of enhanced risk and fraud management strategies. Barclaycard Risk Tendency increased by 21%, commensurate with growth in the portfolio and the impact of the acquisition of Clydesdale Financial Services. Risk Tendency increased in Barclays Private Clients by 44% following the acquisition of Banco Zaragozano. It fell in Barclays Capital by 38% following the recovery in wholesale credit markets and improvement in the quality and reduction in the size of the loan portfolio. Risk tendency also increased in Transition Businesses after assets were transferred into this portfolio (see page 68).
Risk Tendency by Business Cluster
Non-performing loans, against which specific provisions are held, are excluded from this calculation. Adjustments to these provisions in the light of emerging information about the borrowers financial strength can collectively have a substantial influence on the annual credit expense that is not captured in Risk Tendency.
Credit Risk Portfolio ManagementBarclays uses mechanisms such as credit derivatives, securitisations and asset sales to reduce the uncertainty of returns from the credit portfolio. The benefits are reflected in reduced credit risk provisions and/or reduced volatility of earnings and consequently an improved return on economic capital. More information on credit risk portfolio management appears on page 38.
30
Risk ManagementAnalysis of Loans and Advances
Analysis of Loans and Advances
Loans and advances grew over the year, increasing by £28.2bn (10.7%) to £291.8bn at 31st December 2003.
The management of retail credit risk is different from wholesale credit risk. In retail, where there are millions of loans and advances, both initial and ongoing account maintenance decisions are driven by efficient, smart systems which have been developed using the Groups considerable accumulated experience. In contrast, wholesale loans are more complex and are individually considered, although analytical tools still have a major role.
Outcomes also differ. Typically credit losses in retail portfolios are more stable (though not necessarily lower) than those in wholesale portfolios where the default of an individual large loan can have a significant impact. The table below shows the Groups retail and wholesale loan exposures.
Loans and advances
The analysis above is based on the business unit in which the loans are booked. Those businesses that deal primarily with personal customers, such as Personal Financial Services and Barclaycard, are included under retail businesses, even though they have some wholesale customers. Similarly, businesses that deal primarily with corporate, institutional and sovereign clients are included in wholesale businesses, even though they may have some personal customers.
In subsequent pages, considerable detail on loans and advances is provided. A principal segmentation is between exposures to banks and to customers as introduced in the next table.
Loans and advances by banking and trading books
The amounts shown in the tables above are before deduction of provisions and interest in suspense. The banking book comprises loans and advances which are intended to be held to maturity or until repayment by the customer. In contrast the loans and advances on the trading book are held for sale.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 31
Loans and Advances to Banks
The majority of loans and advances to banks are placings, amounting to £56.5bn at 31st December 2003 (2002: £48.1bn), and include reverse repo transactions. Also included are loans to banks and building societies, interbank settlement accounts and federal funds sold. Loans and advances to banks increased by 6% to £61.9bn at 31st December 2003 (2002: £58.3bn).
The amounts shown in the tables below are before deductions of provisions and interest in suspense.
Maturity analysis of loans and advances to banks
Interest rate sensitivity of loans and advances to banks1
1 Where a loan is earning a fixed rate on the reporting date, it is included as a fixed rate loan, regardless of the term for which the rate is fixed.
32
Loans and Advances to Customers
Geographic analysis of loans and advances to customers on the banking book*
Industry analysisA critical element of risk management is to ensure adequate diversification of credit exposures. Barclays tracks its global exposure by industry as shown in the following chart, paying particular attention to industries that might be volatile or pose higher risk. This is important, because industries are often synchronised globally, as has been apparent over recent years. For example, when oil prices rise or fall, customers sensitive to such changes will be affected regardless of their location. Industry classifications have been prepared at the level of the borrowing entity. This means that a loan to the subsidiary of a major corporation is classified by the industry in which the subsidiary operates, even though the parents predominant business may be in a different industry. Loans to customers domiciled outside the country where the office recording the transaction is located are shown in the chart below under Overseas customers and not by industry.
Global loans and advances to customers by industry banking book only (% of total)
The chart shows that Barclays largest sectoral exposures are to home loans, other personal loans and business and other services. These categories overwhelmingly comprise small loans, have lower volatility of credit risk outcomes, and are intrinsically highly diversified.
During 2003, the sectors that were of special interest in 2002 energy, utilities and telecommunications all improved. Nevertheless, some of the companies within these sectors still have weak balance sheets and continue to be stressed. The tourism, travel and airline sub-sectors were also of concern in 2003, in part due to global terrorist threats, SARS and the war in the Middle East, in part due to competition and discounting within these sectors. In the property sector, commercial office space was in excess supply in London and the South East of the United Kingdom.
Commentators anticipated higher credit losses in the mortgage market due to an expected decline in house prices. This followed several years of rapid price rises and with higher interest rates in prospect. Although there was a modest interest rate rise, house prices increased further and mortgage defaults fell from an already very low level. There was also interest in other retail credits unsecured loans and credit cards in the wake of comments on the record levels of consumer indebtedness relative to incomes by the Bank of England, the FSA and others. However, due to the still low interest rates, consumers debt servicing costs remained well below previous peaks and there was no material impact on Barclays 2003 provision charges.
Maturity analysisThe analysis by contractual maturity shown in the chart below and the table on page 36, indicates that 40% of loans to customers have a maturity of more than five years, the majority of which are mortgages.
Maturity analysis of loans and advances to customers*
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 33
Interest rate sensitivity of loans and advances to customers
Geographic and industry analysisThese tables have been prepared on the basis described on page 33.
Loans and advances to customers booked in offices in the UK banking business
The largest increase in loans and advances in the UK occurred in home loans where balances grew by 6% to £61.9bn. Loans to financial institutions, wholesale, retail and leisure, and property all increased by more than 10% as did finance leases.
Loans and advances to customers booked in offices in other European Union countries banking business
The growth in the European Union especially in home loans reflects the acquisition of Banco Zaragozano and the growth of Openplan in Spain.
34
Loans and advances to customers in offices in the United States banking business
Loans and advances to customers booked in offices in the rest of the world banking business
Total loans and advances to customers
Of the loans and advances to customers, reverse repos were £50.0bn (2002: £42.5bn).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 35
Maturity analysis of loans and advances to customers
36
Risk ManagementLoans and Advances in Non-local Currencies and to Countries Receiving IMF Support
Loans and advances to borrowers in currencies other than the local currency of the borrowerThe worldwide operations of the Group involve significant exposures in non-local currencies.
The US Securities and Exchange Commission requires that Barclays report those exposures denominated in currencies other than the borrowers local currency. These outstandings exclude finance provided within the Group, and are based on the country of domicile of the borrower or guarantor of ultimate risk. They comprise loans and advances to customers and banks (including placings), finance lease receivables, interest bearing investments, acceptances, other monetary assets and on-balance sheet amounts arising from off-balance sheet financial instruments.
At 31st December 2003, the countries where these outstandings exceeded 1% of total Group assets were the United States and Germany and amounted to £17,237m. At 31st December 2002 and 31st December 2001, the countries where these outstandings exceeded 1% of total Group assets were the US, Germany and France and amounted to £32,105m and £20,715m respectively. Further detail is provided in the table below.
Loans and advances to borrowers in currencies other than the local currency of the borrower for countries where this exceeds1% of total Group assets
Loans and advances to borrowers in currencies other than the local currency of the borrower for countries where this is between0.75% and 1% of total Group assetsAt 31st December 2003, Barclays had cross-currency loans to borrowers in France of between 0.75% and 1% of total Group assets, amounting to £3,570m. At 31st December 2002, there were cross-currency loans to borrowers in the Netherlands and Ireland of between 0.75% and 1% of total Group assets, amounting to £7,552m. At 31st December 2001, cross-currency loans to borrowers in Japan and Netherlands fell in the range between 0.75% and 1% of total Group assets and totalled £5,774m.
Countries receiving IMF supportBarclays exposure to countries receiving substantial IMF support amounted to £0.5bn in total at 2003 year end (2002: £0.5bn, 2001: £1.3bn). The largest exposure was to Turkey (£0.3bn).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 37
Risk ManagementOther Credit Risks
Other Credit Risks
Off balance sheet and other credit exposuresas at 31st December
The nature of the credit risks in these exposures differs considerably. Losses resulting from exposures held for trading (derivatives, debt securities) are accounted for as trading losses, rather than credit charges, even though the fall in value causing the loss may be attributable to a credit deterioration.
Further details on contingent liabilities are shown in Note 44 to the Accounts (page 140). They include guarantees, assets pledged as collateral, acceptances and endorsements. These reflect contracts entered into on behalf of customers who undertake to compensate the bank for payments made on their behalf. The credit risk exists in that the customers may not meet their commitments when they arise.
Commitments to lend (see also Note 44 on page 140) are contractual undertakings to lend to customers during a specified period or at a future date or they may be ongoing facilities subject to periodic review. These facilities are available to be used by customers, usually at their discretion, and may therefore become loans.
Balances arising from off balance sheet financial instruments represent the positive mark to market or otherwise assessed fair values of derivatives. See Note 45 (page 141), for a comprehensive disclosure of derivatives. The management of the market risk inherent in derivatives is described on page 53 along with a description of derivatives used. The credit risk in these instruments exists in that the counterparty may be unable to settle when settlement is due in Barclays favour. Most derivatives are with highly rated counterparties.
Debt securities are shown in Note 17 (page 124), and London Metals Exchange exposures are disclosed in Note 23 (page 128).
Credit Risk Portfolio Management and the Use of Credit Derivatives
Credit derivatives are traded for profit and used for managing non-trading credit exposures. The extent of these activities is illustrated in the table below:
Notional principal amounts of credit derivativesat 31st December
See Note 45 (page 141), for further details of the credit derivative positions.
During 2003, Barclays also sold loan assets. When non-performing loans for which provisions were held were sold, the net proceeds were applied to the relevant exposures and related provisions. These sales are distinct from Barclays substantial loan trading business.
Barclays securitised £3.3bn of loan assets comprising credit card and other receivables. Most of the credit risk associated with these assets was retained.
38
Risk ManagementPotential Credit Risk Lendings
Potential Credit Risk Lendings
Potential credit risk lendings (PCRLs) comprise non-performing loans (NPLs) and potential problem loans (PPLs). NPLs are loans where the customers have failed to meet their commitments, either in part or in whole. PPLs are loans which are current as to payment of principal and interest, but where there exists serious doubt as to the ability of the borrowers to comply with repayment terms in the near future.
UK non-performing loans decreased by 1% (£26m) to £3,311m (2002: £3,337m). Other European Union non-performing loans increased by 34% (£58m) from £173m to £231m, reflecting growth in the portfolio, including acquisitions. US non-performing loans decreased by 49% (£361m) to £383m as the exposures in this category were written off, restructured, upgraded, sold or otherwise worked out at a faster rate than new non-performing loans arose. In the Rest of the World non-performing loans decreased by 15%, to £230m.
The table that follows presents an analysis of non-performing loans consistent with both UK and US practice and US Securities and Exchange Commission guidelines. In conformance with UK practice, accruing loans where interest is being suspended (with or without provisions) and other accruing loans where specific provisions have been raised are shown separately from non-accrual loans. Normal US banking practice would be to place such loans on non-accrual status as reflected in the sub-total in the table below.
The amounts are stated before deduction of the value of security held, the specific provisions carried or interest suspended, all of which might reduce the impact of an eventual default, should it occur.
Non-performing loans
Potential problem loans
Non-performing loans summary
A geographical analysis of this table appears on the next page.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 39
Interest forgone on non-performing loans
Ratios of provisions to non-performing loans and potential credit risk lendings appear in the next section on page 47, following the discussion of provisions.
40
Risk ManagementProvisions for Bad and Doubtful Debts
Provisions for Bad and Doubtful Debts
Barclays policy is to provide for credit losses when it considers that recovery is doubtful. Risk managers continuously review the quality of the exposures and make provisions where necessary, based on their knowledge of the customer or counterparty, and developments in the industry and country of operation.
Provisioning approach
Total provisions are comprised of two components, specific provisions and general provisions.
Specific provisions are raised when the Group considers that the creditworthiness of a borrower has deteriorated such that recovery of the whole or part of an outstanding advance is in serious doubt.
General provisions reflect losses that, although not specifically identified, are known from experience to be present in the lending portfolio at the balance sheet date. These provisions are adjusted at least half yearly by an appropriate charge or release.
General provisions are also created with respect to the recoverability of assets arising from off-balance sheet exposures and country transfer risk, all prepared in a manner consistent with the general provisioning methodology.
Write-off occurs immediately when, and to the extent that, the whole or part of a debt is considered irrecoverable.
See also page 92 (Critical Accounting estimates) and page 103 (Accounting policies: loans and advances) for a description of relevant terms and policies.
Provisions charge over ten years
Provisions charge over ten years as a percentage of the banking book
The provisions charge fell 9% (£137m) to £1,347m (2002: £1,484m). Provisions excluding the impact of Transition Businesses, mainly Argentina in 2002, fell 3% (£36m) to £1,324m (2002: £1,360m).
Business Banking provisions increased broadly in line with portfolio growth. Provisions fell in Barclays Capital reflecting the ongoing improvement in the loan book and the continued recovery in the large corporate credit environment.
Provisions fell in Personal Financial Services with an improvement in the quality of the loan portfolio and improved risk management. The reduction occurred in the unsecured lending portfolio. Provisions charges for mortgages remained at a very low rate. Barclaycard provisions increased in line with continued portfolio growth.
Further details appear in the analysis of results by business starting on page 78.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 41
Analysis of the provisions charges for bad and doubtful debts
Bad debt provisions charge ratios (Loan loss ratios)
42
Provisions charge analysis
Provision balances
Analysis of provision balances for bad and doubtful debts
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 43
Provisions balance ratios
Treatment of interest on debts that have specific provisionsIf the collection of interest is doubtful, it is credited to a suspense account and excluded from interest income in the profit and loss account. Although interest continues to be charged to the customers account, the amount suspended is netted against the relevant loan. Loans on which interest is suspended are not reclassified as accruing interest until interest and principal payments are up-to-date and future payments are reasonably assured. If the collection of interest is considered remote, interest is no longer applied.
Treatment of collateral assets acquired in exchange for advancesAssets acquired in exchange for advances in order to achieve an orderly realisation continue to be reported as advances. The assets acquired are recorded at the carrying value of the original advance as at the date of the exchange and any impairment is accounted for as a specific provision.
Movements in provisions for bad and doubtful debts
A geographical analysis of the values in this summary table follows in the next three tables.
44
Amounts written off
Recoveries
Provisions charged against profit
Total provisions for bad and doubtful debts at end of year comprise:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 45
Specific provisions charges and balances for bad and doubtful debts by industry
These tables have been prepared on the basis described on page 33.
46
Coverage ratios
The coverage of non-performing loans by the Groups stock of provisions and interest in suspense increased from 68.0% at 31st December 2002 to 74.1% at 31st December 2003. Over the same period, coverage of potential credit risk lendings increased from 52.8% to 54.6%.
Total provisions coverage of non-performing loans
Total provisions coverage of potential credit risk lendings (NPLs and PPLs)
The general provision is allocated according to the characteristics of the loans in each geographic area.
Another useful way of assessing provision balances is to recognise that specific provisions are created to cover non-performing loans, whereas general provisions relate to as yet unidentified losses on performing loans. The following table provides an analysis of provision balances on this basis.
Ratios of general and specific provision balances
The ratio of general provisions to performing loans declined in 2000 and 2001 following the acquisition of Woolwich plc, a portfolio consisting predominantly of secured residential mortgage loans needing comparatively low general provisions. Performing loans comprise gross loans and advances less non-performing loans. All non-performing loans are on the banking book.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 47
Risk ManagementMarket Risk Management
Market Risk Management
Market risk is the risk that the Groups earnings or capital, or its ability to meet business objectives, will be adversely affected by changes in the level or volatility of market rates or prices such as interest rates including credit spreads, foreign exchange rates, equity prices, and commodity prices.
Market risk management and control responsibilitiesThe market risk management policies of the Group are determined by the Group Risk Oversight Committee, which also recommends overall market risk appetite, via the Group Executive Committee, to the Board Risk Committee. The Groups policy is that the market risks associated with the Groups business activities are clearly identified, assessed and controlled within agreed limits and that the market risks arising from trading activities are concentrated in Barclays Capital.
The Group Market Risk Director is responsible for the content, effectiveness and efficiency of the Groups market risk control framework, and is assisted by risk management departments in the Groups businesses and a central market risk management team. The Group Market Risk Director reports to the Group Financial Risk Director who reports to the Group Risk Director.
The Group Risk Oversight Committee allocates a total Daily Value at Risk (DVaR) limit for the Group and delegates the day-to-day control and monitoring of market risk to the Group Market Risk Director, who sets limits for each business area. To assist this process, a market risk report is produced daily which summarises the Groups market risk exposures against agreed limits. Data for this report is supplied by the business areas. This daily report is sent to the Group Risk Director, the Group Financial Risk Director, the Group Market Risk Director, the Group Finance Director and the appropriate Business Risk Directors.
A more detailed market risk report is presented each month by the Group Market Risk Director to the Group Risk Oversight Committee. This report brings to the attention of all Committee members current Group market risk exposures and issues along with relevant background information.
Each business area of the Group is accountable for identifying, measuring and managing all market risks associated with its activities. In managing market risk, businesses must consider asset liquidity risk and funding liquidity risk where these issues are relevant.
Market risk measurementBarclays uses DVaR as the primary mechanism for controlling market risk. DVaR is an estimate, with a confidence level of 98%, of the potential loss which might arise if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day. Daily losses exceeding the DVaR figure are likely to occur, on average, twice in every 100 business days.
Where DVaR does not adequately measure the risk, alternative methods are used such as Annual Earnings at Risk. Annual Earnings at Risk measures the sensitivity of annual earnings to shocks in market rates at the 99th percentile for change over a one-year period. This shock is consistent with the standardised interest rate shock recommended by the Basel II framework for assessing banking book interest rate risk.
To facilitate the identification, measurement, control and reporting of market risk, Barclays has categorised market risk into three broad categories as described below:
(i) Trading market riskTrading includes transactions where Barclays Capital acts as principal with clients or with the market. A detailed review of this risk is provided below.
(ii) Asset and liability managementThe Group encounters risks in managing its assets and liabilities. A detailed review of these risks is covered in the Treasury Asset and Liability Management section on pages 54 to 57.
(iii) Other market risksIn some instances, the Group incurs market risks that do not fit into the above categories. The principal risks of this type are asset management structural market risk and defined benefit pension scheme risk. These are covered below.
Trading Market Risk
As mentioned above, the Groups policy is to concentrate trading activities in Barclays Capital. Trading includes transactions where Barclays Capital acts as principal with clients or with the market. For maximum efficiency, Barclays manages client and market activities together. In Barclays Capital, trading risk occurs in both the trading book and the banking book as defined for regulatory purposes.
In anticipation of future customer demand, the Group maintains access to market liquidity by quoting bid and offer prices with other market makers and carries an inventory of capital market and treasury instruments, including a broad range of cash, securities and derivatives. Trading positions and any offsetting hedges are established as appropriate to accommodate customer or Group requirements. Barclays Capital takes principal positions in the interest rate, credit spread, foreign exchange, equity and commodity markets based on expectations of customer demand or a change in market conditions.
Derivatives entered into for trading purposes include swaps, forward rate agreements, futures, credit derivatives, options and combinations of these instruments. For a description of the nature of derivative instruments, see page 53.
48
Risk controlIn Barclays Capital, the Head of Market Risk is responsible for the market risk governance and control framework. Day-to-day responsibility for managing exposure to market risk lies with the senior management of Barclays Capital, supported by the Global Market Risk Management Unit that operates independently of the trading areas. Daily DVaR utilisation reports are produced across the main business areas and the five main risk factor categories, namely interest rate, credit spread, foreign exchange, equity and commodity risk.
Any DVaR excess at the business level, risk factor level or total level, along with the relevant background information and proposed way forward, is reported to the senior management of Barclays Capital and the Group Market Risk Director. The Group Market Risk Director presents these DVaR excesses to the Group Risk Oversight Committee.
As DVaR does not provide a direct indication of the potential size of losses that could arise in extreme conditions, Barclays Capital uses a number of complementary techniques for controlling market risk. These include revenue loss triggers and stress tests. The latter are based on both historical and hypothetical extreme movements of market prices and are reviewed as part of the detailed market risk presentation at the fortnightly Traded Products Risk Review meetings. The attendees at this meeting include senior managers from Barclays Capital and Group Central Functions.
If the potential loss indicated by a stress test exceeds an agreed trigger level, then the positions captured by the stress test are reviewed and discussed by Barclays Capital Market Risk and the respective Business Head(s). The minutes of the discussion, including the merits of the position and the appropriate course of action, are then sent to the Group Market Risk Director.
Risk measurementBarclays Capital calculates DVaR using the historical simulation method with a historical sample of two years. As stated above, the calculation assumes a one-day holding period and is performed to the 98% level of confidence.
The DVaR methodology allows the interest rate risk (due to changes in the government interest rates) to be measured separately from credit spread risk (due to changes in credit spreads). The credit spread is the premium for holding a non-government investment, and is the difference between the total interest rate and the appropriate government interest rate, for the same maturity.
In total, the DVaR methodology maps interest rate risk into eight categories. These are government, interest rate swaps and six credit grades for non-government exposures. This categorisation allows the measurement process to discriminate between the market risk of holding bonds with different credit qualities, for example AAA grade securities as against non-investment grade securities. In particular, it shows the effectiveness of hedging strategies such as shorting government bonds or swaps against non-government bond portfolios.
The DVaR numbers shown in the table below are all based on the above methodology.
Analysis of market risk exposuresBarclays Capitals market risk exposure increased in 2003. The credit businesses incurred additional credit spread risk, primarily due to growing client business in corporate bonds and credit derivatives.
The daily average, maximum and minimum values of DVaR were estimated as below.
Barclays Capital DVaR: Summary table for 2003 and 2002
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 49
Total DVaR Daily exposures in 2002 and 2003
Trading revenueThe histograms below show the distribution of market risk daily trading revenue for Barclays Capital in 2003 and 2002. Market risk daily trading revenue includes all primary income (net fees and commissions) and secondary income (net interest income and dealing profits). The average daily revenue in 2003 was £10.0m (2002: £8.7m) and there were 244 positive revenue days out of 254 (2002: 238 positive revenue days out of 252).
Barclays Capital Trading Revenue 2003 (£m)
Barclays Capital Trading Revenue 2002 (£m)
Regulatory DVaR and back-testingBarclays Capitals DVaR model, along with the market risk management and control infrastructure, has been approved by the FSA under the internal model approach for calculating regulatory capital for general market risk. For regulatory DVaR, the methodology maps interest rate risk into one category (interest rate swaps), rather than the eight categories described above. Model recognition was first given in 1999.
Barclays recognises the importance of assessing the effectiveness of its DVaR model. The main approach employed is the technique known as back-testing, which counts the number of days when trading related losses are bigger than the estimated DVaR figure. The regulatory standard for back-testing is to measure DVaR assuming a one-day holding period with a 99% level of confidence. For Barclays Capitals regulatory trading book, there were no instances in 2003 of a daily trading revenue loss exceeding the corresponding back-testing DVaR. In 2002, there were two instances.
Other Market Risks
Asset management structural market riskAsset management structural market risk is the risk that fee and commission income is affected by a change in equity market levels. It affects Barclays Private Clients assets under management, Barclays Life and Barclays Global Investors. This risk is measured and managed using Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) where the potential reduction in income is measured over a year. For more detail on AEaR, see market risk measurement on page 48. In 2003, Barclays Private Clients placed a series of hedges which reduced the market risk for 2003 and 2004.
Defined benefit pension scheme riskBarclays maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of the pension fund to meet the projected pension payments is maintained through investments. Market risk arises because the market value of the pension fund assets might decline or their investment returns might reduce or because the present value of the pension liabilities might increase. In these circumstances, Barclays might be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund.
50
Risk ManagementDisclosures about Certain Trading Activities including Non-exchange Traded Contracts
The US Securities and Exchange Commission requires disclosures relating to certain trading activities, particularly energy trading and commodity trading through non-exchange traded contracts.
The Group delivers a fully integrated service to clients for base metals, precious metals, energy products (covering US natural gas, oil and oil-related products) and European power and gas through Barclays Capital. The base and precious metals business enters into outright metal purchase and sales transactions as well as the associated over the counter (OTC) and exchange traded derivatives. The energy business deals in commodity derivative contracts but does not maintain any physical exposures. Structured products are also developed and offered in respect of energy, base and precious metal and power and gas commodities. The European power and gas business trades both physical forwards and derivative contracts.
The Groups commodity business continues to expand, as market conditions allow, both through the addition of new products and markets in European power and gas, and the continuing growth in the existing metals and energy trading volumes.
The Groups principal commodity related derivative contracts are swaps, options, forwards and futures, which are similar in nature to such non-commodity related contracts. Commodity derivatives contracts include commodity specification and delivery location as well as forward date and notional values.
The fair values of commodity physical and derivative positions are determined through a combination of recognised market observable prices, exchange prices and established inter-commodity relationships. In common with all derivatives, the fair value of OTC commodity derivative contracts is either determined using a quoted market price or by using valuation models. Where a valuation model is used, the fair value is determined based on the expected cash flows under the terms of each specific contract, discounted back to present value. The expected cash flows for each contract are either determined using market parameters such as commodity price curves, commodity volatilities, interest rate yield curves and foreign exchange rates, or derived from historical or other market prices.
Fair values generated by models are independently validated with reference to market price quotes, or price sharing with other institutions. However, where no observable market parameter is available then instrument fair value will include a provision for the uncertainty in that parameter based on sale price or subsequent traded levels.
Discounting of expected cash flows back to present value is achieved by constructing discount curves from the market price of observable interest rate products, such as deposits, interest rate futures and swaps. In addition, the Group maintains fair value adjustments reflecting the cost of credit risk (where this is not embedded in the fair value), future administration costs associated with ongoing operational support of products, the cost of exiting illiquid or significant positions, as well as the cost of trading out of a position (all positions are marked to mid-market and hence the bid/offer cost would be incurred).
The tables on page 52 analyse the overall fair value of the commodity derivative contracts by movement over time and source of fair value. Additionally, the positive fair value, adjusted for the impact of netting, of such contracts is analysed by counterparty credit risk rating.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 51
The following tables analyse the overall fair value of the commodity derivative contracts by movement over time and source of fair value. As at 31st December 2003 this reflects a gross positive fair value of £1,982m (31st December 2002: £701m) and a gross negative fair value of (£2,088m) (31st December 2002:(£661m)). Realised and unrealised profits related to physical commodity and commodity derivative activities are included within dealing profits. Physical commodity positions are held at fair value and reported within other assets in Note 23 on page 128.
Movement in fair value of commodity derivative positions
Source of commodity derivative fair values
The following table analyses the positive fair value, adjusted for the impact of netting, arising on commodity derivative contracts. As at 31st December 2003, this reflects a gross positive fair value of £1,982m (31st December 2002: £701m) adjusted for the Groups ability to net amounts due to the same counterparties (31st December 2003: £864m, 31st December 2002: £351m).
Analysis of net positive commodity derivative fair value by counterparty credit risk rating
At 31st December 2003, 70% of the commodities credit exposure was to counterparties with cross asset class netting agreements, that is, netting agreements allowing exposure on commodities products to be reduced by amounts owed to the same counterparties in other asset classes. Additionally, collateral agreements are held with a majority of these same counterparties that allow collateral to be called against commodity exposures.
52
Risk ManagementDerivatives
The use of derivatives and their sale to customers as risk management products is an integral part of the Groups trading activities. These instruments are also used to manage the Groups own exposure to fluctuations in interest and exchange rates as part of its asset and liability management activities.
Barclays Capital manages the trading derivatives book as part of the market risk book. This includes foreign exchange, interest rate, equity, commodity and credit derivatives. The policies regarding market risk management are outlined in the market risk management section on pages 48 to 50.
The policies for derivatives that are used to manage the Groups own exposure to interest and exchange rate fluctuations are outlined in the treasury asset and liability management section on pages 54 to 57.
Derivative instruments are contracts whose value is derived from one or more underlying financial instruments or indices defined in the contract. They include swaps, forward rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these instruments and primarily affect the Groups net interest income, dealing profits, commissions received and other assets and liabilities. Notional amounts of the contracts are not recorded on the balance sheet.
The Group participates both in exchange traded and OTC derivatives markets.
Exchange traded derivativesThe Group buys and sells financial instruments that are traded or cleared on an exchange, including interest rate swaps, futures and options on futures. Holders of exchange traded instruments provide margin daily with cash or other security at the exchange, to which the holders look for ultimate settlement.
Over the counter traded derivatives (OTC)The Group also buys and sells financial instruments that are traded over the counter, rather than on a recognised exchange.
These instruments range from commoditised transactions in derivative markets, to trades where the specific terms are tailored to the requirements of the Groups customers. In many cases, industry standard documentation is used, most commonly in the form of a master agreement, with individual transaction confirmations. The existence of a signed master agreement is intended to give the Group protection in situations where a counterparty is in default, including the ability to net outstanding balances where the rules of offset are legally enforceable. For further explanation of the Groups policies on netting, see Accounting policies on pages 101 to 106.
Foreign exchange derivativesThe Groups principal exchange rate related contracts are forward foreign exchange contracts, currency swaps and currency options. Forward foreign exchange contracts are agreements to buy or sell a specified quantity of foreign currency, usually on a specified future date at an agreed rate. A currency swap generally involves the exchange, or notional exchange, of equivalent amounts of two currencies and a commitment to exchange interest periodically until the principal amounts are re-exchanged on a future date.
Currency options provide the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a fixed amount of a currency at a specified exchange rate on or before a future date. As compensation for assuming the option risk, the option writer generally receives a premium at the start of the option period.
Interest rate derivativesThe Groups principal interest rate related contracts are interest rate swaps, forward rate agreements, basis swaps, caps, floors and swaptions. Included in this product category are transactions that include combinations of these features.
An interest rate swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange fixed rate and floating rate interest by means of periodic payments based upon a notional principal amount and the interest rates defined in the contract. Certain agreements combine interest rate and foreign currency swap transactions, which may or may not include the exchange of principal amounts. A basis swap is a form of interest rate swap, in which both parties exchange interest payments based on floating rates, where the floating rates are based upon different underlying reference indices. In a forward rate agreement, two parties agree a future settlement of the difference between an agreed rate and a future interest rate, applied to a notional principal amount. The settlement, which generally occurs at the start of the contract period, is the discounted present value of the payment that would otherwise be made at the end of that period.
Equity derivativesThe Groups principal equity related contracts are equity and stock index swaps and options (including warrants, which are equity options listed on an exchange). An equity swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange periodic payments, based upon a notional principal amount, with one side paying fixed or floating interest and the other side paying based on the actual return of the stock or stock index. No principal amounts are exchanged. An equity option provides the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a specified stock, basket of stocks or stock index at a specified price or level on or before a specified date.
Credit derivativesThe Groups principal credit derivative related contracts include credit default swaps and total return swaps. A credit derivative is an arrangement whereby the credit risk of an asset (the reference asset) is transferred from the buyer to the seller of protection.
A credit default swap is a contract where the protection seller receives premium or interest related payments in return for contracting to make payments to the protection buyer upon a defined credit event. Credit events normally include bankruptcy, payment default on a reference asset or assets and downgrades by a rating agency.
A total return swap is an instrument whereby the seller of protection receives the full return of the asset, including both the income and change in the capital value of the asset. The buyer in return receives a predetermined amount.
A description of how credit derivatives are used within the Group is provided on pages 38 and 95.
A description of the impact of derivatives under US GAAP is set out on page 182.
Commodity derivativesThe Groups principal commodity related derivative contracts are swaps, options, forwards and futures. The main commodities transacted are base metals, precious metals, energy products (covering US natural gas, oil and oil-related products) and European power and gas.
A description of commodity derivatives is provided on page 51.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 53
Risk ManagementTreasury Asset and Liability Management
Group Treasury actively manages the financial risks relating to the Groups assets and liabilities, which comprise liquidity, funding and funding concentration risks, structural interest rate risks and exchange rate risks.
Group Treasury policies are set by the Group Treasury Committee which is chaired by the Group Finance Director. Group policy is to centralise retail asset and liability management within Group Treasury to minimise earnings volatility and meet Group control standards. The Group Treasury Committee sanctions Liquidity and Structural Interest Rate risk limits across the Group and ensures compliance via a limit and control monitoring structure in collaboration with the local Asset and Liability Committees (ALCOs).
Liquidity risk managementLiquidity risk is the risk that the Group is unable to meet its payment obligations when they fall due and to replace funds when they are withdrawn; the consequence of which may be the failure to meet obligations to repay depositors and fulfil commitments to lend.
Group Treasury is responsible for the Groups overall liquidity policy and control which is managed to ensure that the Group can meet its current and future re-financing needs at all times and at acceptable costs. The Groups liquidity position was strong at 31st December 2003.
Liquidity management within the Group has two main strands. The first is day to day funding, managed by monitoring future cash flows to ensure that requirements can be met. This includes replenishment of existing funds as they mature or are withdrawn to satisfy demands for additional borrowings by customers. The second is maintaining a portfolio of highly marketable assets that can easily be liquidated as protection against any unforeseen interruption to cash flow.
Monitoring and reporting take the form of cash flow measurement and projections for the next day, week and month as these are key periods for liquidity management. This is based on principles agreed by the UK Financial Services Authority. Each operation is required to maintain sufficient access to funds, in terms of maturing assets and proven capacity to borrow in the money markets.
Additionally, in evaluating the Groups liquidity position, Group Treasury monitors unmatched medium-term assets and the level and type of undrawn lending commitments, the usage of overdraft facilities and the impact of contingent liabilities such as standby letters of credit and guarantees.
An important source of liquidity is our core UK retail deposits, mainly current accounts and savings accounts. Although current accounts are repayable on demand and savings accounts are repayable at short notice, maintaining a broad base of customers, both numerically and by depositor type, helps to protect against unexpected fluctuations. Such accounts form a stable deposit base for the Groups operations and liquidity needs.
In order to avoid reliance on a particular group of customers or market sectors, the distribution of sources and maturity profile of deposits are also carefully managed. Important factors in assuring liquidity are competitive rates and the maintenance of depositors confidence. Such confidence is based on a number of factors including the Groups reputation, the strength of earnings and the Groups financial position.
In overseas markets, day to day liquidity is the responsibility of local treasury management in each territory within the parameters set by Group Treasury and subject to regular reports to Group Treasury in order to maximise the benefits of knowledge gained. Local asset and liability management committees comprising senior local executives and Group Treasury representatives also review liquidity management depending on the size and complexity of the treasury operation.
Sources of liquidity are regularly reviewed to maintain a wide diversification by currency, geography, provider and product. Whilst 2003 saw a relatively stable situation, with no notable consequences for the Groups liquidity, significant market events over recent years including corporate scandals all resulted in a short-term flight to quality in financial markets from which Barclays benefited.
The ability to raise funds is in part dependent on maintaining the Groups credit rating, although, except at extremes, a credit downgrade is likely to affect only the price at which funding is available rather than the volume that can be raised.
Many factors contribute to the credit rating process including assessment of management capability, and the quality of the corporate governance and risk management processes. The Group considers one of the most important factors in preserving its strong credit rating, which is a core objective, is maintaining a strong capital base and strong capital ratios.
For further details see contractual cash obligations and commercial commitments of the Group on page 57.
54
Interest rate risk managementInterest rate risk is the risk of loss arising from adverse movements in the level or volatility of market interest rates. The interest rate risk arising from the UK banking operations is aggregated and managed by Group Treasury.
Overall mismatches of fixed rate assets and liabilities are managed in the aggregate by Group Treasury through the use of interest rate swaps and other derivatives. Care is taken to ensure that the management of the portfolio is flexible, as market circumstances and customer requirements can rapidly change the desired portfolio structure. Group Treasury can exercise some discretion within limits prescribed by Group Market Risk with respect to the risk management of these positions and flows.
The exposure is then passed to the market mainly via independently managed dealing units within Barclays Capital who treat these transactions as part of their normal trading activities, and also via third parties. Risks arising in the Groups other banking operations are managed in a similar way.
Management of the retail positions inherent in the Groups balance sheet include the structural interest rate risk associated with interest free deposits, other interest free or fixed rate liabilities as well as the Groups shareholders funds. The positions arising from these balances are managed by the maintenance of assets with fixed interest rates over several years, including loans and advances to customers and debt securities, and also variable rate assets. Derivatives are also employed to hedge both the structural interest rate risk resulting from interest free deposits and the Groups shareholders funds.
The earnings from retail products (generally in personal and corporate banking) can also be adversely affected by customer behaviour and movements in the level or volatility of market rates and prices. The risk embedded within retail contracts is managed by a specialist Retail Market Risk Unit. It is measured using behavioural models and then converted into wholesale swap and option exposure, which is transferred to Group Treasury at an appropriate market rate transfer price. This leaves residual risk within the business to the extent that wholesale contracts do not replicate the market or customer behaviour. This risk is controlled by limits set by Group Market Risk.
International banking operations also incur market interest rate risk. Policies for managing this risk are agreed between Group Treasury and Group Market Risk and are applied through Asset and Liability Committees (ALCOs). Guidance on the scope and constitution of ALCOs is provided by Group Market Risk, which maintains regular contact with the businesses on treasury issues. Compliance with the policy is controlled via a comprehensive financial risk reporting framework including interest rate gap limits or value at risk limits issued by Group Market Risk. These limits allow banking books to be managed by local treasury operations in an orderly fashion, either through Barclays Capital or, where necessary, through local markets.
The Group exposure, excluding Barclays Capital interest rate risk (which is disclosed within the preceding Market Risk section), is shown in the form of an interest rate repricing table (see Note 45, page 141) and includes non-trading hedges. This summarises the repricing profile of the Groups assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet exposures at 31st December 2003. The table provides the basis for assessment of the sensitivity of the Groups earnings to interest rate movements. Based on the Group balance sheet as at 31st December 2003, the Groups expected earnings in 2004 would not be significantly affected either by a hypothetical immediate and sustained 1% increase or decrease in interest rates.
Group risk management activities employing interest rate swaps, currency swaps, basis swaps and other derivatives that are designated as hedges. The derivative components of the Groups hedging programme are transferred to the market via internal or external counterparties.
Interest rate swaps and cross currency interest rate swaps that are used in the management of the non-trading exposures are shown in the table below (except for those within Barclays Capital, where the exposure is included in the reported DVaR figures, see page 49). These figures are the weighted average pay fixed rates and receive fixed rates by maturity date and nominal amount at 31st December 2003. The nominal amounts below include £5,320m and £495m, in respect of sterling and non-sterling basis swaps respectively. Basis swaps are swaps where both payable and receivable legs are at variable rates of interest. In managing the non-trading exposures relating to capital balances and demand deposits, both on-balance sheet and derivative positions are held.
The reported figures do not take account of underlying balance sheet items being hedged, the net interest income thereon or their mark to market values.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 55
Analysis of weighted-average receive fixed and pay fixed rates by reset maturity date and nominal amount at 31st December 2003
The net effect of the derivative positions, in isolation, on net interest income was a credit of £240m (2002: £246m). This included credits of £273m (2002: £242m) and debits of £33m (2002: credits of £4m) for interest rate and exchange rate derivatives respectively.
Foreign exchange risk managementCorporate and retail banking businesses incur foreign exchange risk in the course of providing services to their customers. The part of this risk that arises in UK operations is transferred directly to and managed by Barclays Capital as reported in the previous section. Group Market Risk allocates modest foreign exchange open position limits to international operations to facilitate the management of customer originated flows. Exposures are reported daily to Group Market Risk. Throughout 2002 and 2003, aggregate DVaR of these businesses for foreign exchange rate risk was immaterial.
Management of foreign currency investmentsNon-trading positions in foreign currencies arise from the currency investments that the Group makes in its overseas businesses. Group Treasury manages the funding and financing of these investments so as to limit the effect of exchange rate movements on the Groups risk asset ratios. The principal structural currency exposures of the Group are set out on page 142.
These positions, together with the currency composition of tiers 2 and 3 capital and minority interests in tier 1 and tier 2 capital, ensure that movements in exchange rates have little impact on the Groups risk asset ratios. However, exchange rate movements do have an impact on reserves (see Consolidated statement of changes in reserves on page 111). With the positions in place at 31st December 2003, a hypothetical increase of 10% in the value of sterling against all currencies would have led to a fall of some £79m in reserves (2002: £36m).
56
Additional information on liquidity managementThe tables below give details of the contractual obligations and commercial commitments of the Group as at 31st December 2003.
Contractual obligations
Included within long-term debt is dated loan capital and debts securities in issue.
Purchase obligations relate to contracts for the provision of services such as office supplies, telecommunications and maintenance and sponsorship agreements where the Bank has entered into legally binding contracts to purchase products or services over a specified period of time.
Other long-term liabilities relate to obligations relating to the Groups main defined benefit pension plans. Amounts are based on current and projected obligations of the plans, performance of plan assets and participant contributions.
Other commercial commitments
Further information on guarantees is provided in Note 61 on page 187.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 57
Risk ManagementManagement of Other Risks
In addition to the risks discussed so far, Barclays also faces a number of other risks which it groups and manages under Non-financial risk. Non-financial risk encompasses operational risk and business risk:
Operational risk is the risk of direct or indirect impacts resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes or systems or from external events. Major sources of operational risk include: implementation of strategic change, integration of acquisitions, outsourcing of operations, dependence on key suppliers, fraud, error, customer service quality, regulatory compliance, payment systems reliability, IT security, recruitment, training and retention of staff, and social and environmental impacts.
Business risk is the risk of adverse impact resulting from a weak competitive position or from poor choice of strategy, markets, products, activities or structures. Major potential sources of business risk include: revenue volatility due to factors outside our control; inflexible cost structures; uncompetitive products or pricing; and structural inefficiencies.
Barclays is expanding its Group-wide commitment to the management of these risks. Barclays will continue to enhance its non-financial practices and methodologies where appropriate and will implement advanced non-financial risk management to enhance shareholder value and the quality of customer service.
Responsibility and control of non-financial risksBarclays has a Group-wide non-financial risk framework, which is approved by the Board and is consistent with and part of the Group Risk Governance framework described earlier. Board Governance Standards have been established for all key areas of identified risk. These standards are high-level articulations of the Boards risk control requirements.
Non-financial risk is subject to management and oversight throughout the organisation.
Measurement and management of non-financial risk
Risk assessmentA consistent approach to the identification and assessment of key risks and controls is undertaken across all business units. Scenario analysis and self-assessment techniques are widely used by business management for risk identification and evaluation of control effectiveness and monitoring capability. Business management determine whether particular risks are effectively managed within business risk appetite or otherwise take remedial action.
Risk event data collection and reportingA standard process is used Group-wide for the recognition, capture, assessment, analysis and reporting of risk events. Quantitative information about both internal and external risk events is used to analyse scenarios and to validate quantitative risk assessments.
ReportingBusiness units are required to report on both a regular and an event-driven basis. The reports include a profile of the key risks to their business objectives, control issues of Group-level significance, and operational risk events (losses or incidents). Specific reports are prepared on a regular basis for the Group Risk Oversight Committee, the Board Risk Committee and the Board Audit Committee.
Economic capitalAs for other risks, economic capital methodologies have been developed to allocate capital to business units for both operational and business risks. This risk-based capital provides businesses with incentives to demonstrate implementation of risk reduction practices or policies. The operational risk economic capital methodology includes the modelling of dominant unexpected risks and adjustments to reflect the business control environment. Continued enhancement of this methodology will support Barclays objective of qualifying for the Advanced Measurement Approach under the proposed Basel II Accord.
Regulatory compliance risk managementRegulatory compliance risk arises from a failure or inability to comply with the laws, regulations or codes applicable specifically to the financial services industry. Non-compliance can lead to fines, public reprimands, damage to reputation, enforced suspension of operations or, in extreme cases, withdrawal of authorisation to operate.
The Group is subject to extensive supervisory and regulatory regimes in the UK, elsewhere in Europe, the US, the Asia-Pacific region and in the other countries around the world in which it operates. Effective management of regulatory compliance risk is a key business line management accountability. It is the primary responsibility of business management to conduct business in accordance with applicable regulations and with an awareness of compliance risk. The Group Compliance Director is responsible for formulating and communicating a risk control framework for the management of compliance risk and for monitoring a reporting framework to assist business management in discharging its responsibility.
58
Legal risk managementEffective management of legal risk is a key business line management accountability. It is the primary responsibility of business management to conduct business in accordance with applicable laws and with an awareness of legal risk. Legal risk may arise in a number of ways, primarily:
The Group identifies and manages legal risk through the effective use of its internal and external legal advisers. The Group General Counsel is responsible for formulating and communicating a risk control framework for the management of legal risk and for monitoring a reporting framework to assist business management in discharging its responsibility.
Tax risk managementThis is the risk of loss or increased charges associated with changes in, or errors in the interpretation of, taxation rates or law. Responsibility for control of this lies with the Group Taxation Director, reporting to the Group Finance Director, and systems are in place to identify and manage this risk.
This includes taking external advice as necessary. The businesses are advised of their obligations to comply with tax and reporting requirements. Whilst managed centrally, taxation staff are located within the business areas, in the UK and overseas, where this adds to the effectiveness of risk management.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 59
Section 2Results
60
Financial Data Barclays PLC
Profit before tax
Earnings per share
Post-tax return on average shareholders funds
Dividends per share
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 61
Consolidated profit and loss account summary(a)
Selected financial statistics
See Notes on page 63.
62
Consolidated balance sheet summary(a)
Weighted risk assets and capital ratios
Notes
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 63
Business Description
Introduction
Barclays is an international financial services group engaged primarily in banking, investment banking and asset management. In terms of market capitalisation employed, Barclays is one of the largest financial services groups in the UK. The Group also operates in many other countries and is a leading provider of global services to multinational corporations and financial institutions in the worlds main financial centres. Worldwide, the Barclays Group had 2,916 branches at 31st December 2003.
The Group is organised in Strategic Business Units (SBUs), which are supported by shared services. Each SBU has been tasked with identifying and implementing value maximising strategies, and achieving these by creating advantage for customers through superior products and services.
For reporting purposes, the SBUs have been organised into the following business groups or clusters:
Results are also provided for Head office functions and other operations. The results for Personal Financial Services and Business Banking are reported after allocating the costs of shared support functions, the UK branch network and other common infrastructure.
The structural changes in the Groups organisation announced on 9th October 2003 took effect from 1st January 2004.
Personal Financial Services
Personal Financial Services (PFS) provides a wide range of products and services to 14 million personal customers throughout the United Kingdom, including current accounts, savings, mortgages, consumer loans and general insurance. These are available to customers through integrated channels comprising the branch network, automated teller machines, telephone banking and online banking.
PFS works closely with other businesses in the Group, in particular Barclays Private Clients, Barclaycard and Business Banking.
Openplan from Barclays and The Woolwich is an integrated banking service that links customers current account, savings and mortgage, allowing customers automatically to switch money to earn a higher rate of interest, avoid overdraft charges, offset credit balances against mortgage balances and borrow at mortgage rates. Openplan offers access through the branch, on the phone and over the internet.
Within PFS, the principal goal has been to do more business with more customers. This has been achieved by building broader and deeper relationships with the existing customer base as well as attracting new customers. There has also been a focus on increasing risk-adjusted returns and continuing to strengthen the quality of the lending portfolio.
Key business developments in 2003:
64
Barclays Private Clients
Barclays Private Clients serves affluent and high net worth clients, primarily in the UK and continental Europe, providing banking and asset management services.
The businesses have continued to maintain a strong focus on improving operational efficiency and developing a distinctive customer service.
The comparison with the 2002 results is impacted by the Caribbean business being accounted for as an associated undertaking, following the formation of FirstCaribbean on 11th October 2002, and by the acquisitions made during 2003.
The contribution recognised from the closed life assurance activities is reported separately to provide increased transparency in the financial reporting within Barclays Private Clients.
Barclays Private Clients works closely with other Group businesses, particularly Personal Financial Services, Business Banking, Barclays Global Investors and Barclays Capital, in order to enhance product development and customer service.
Barclaycard
Barclaycard is one of the leading credit card businesses in Europe. In addition to its operations in the United Kingdom, Barclaycard is active in Germany, Spain, Greece, France, Italy and across Africa.
Barclaycard offers a full range of credit card services to individual and corporate customers, together with card payment facilities to retailers and other businesses.
Barclaycard continued to grow both its domestic and international businesses through organic and non-organic activity in 2003.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 65
Business Banking
Business Banking provides relationship banking to the Groups large, medium and small business customers in the United Kingdom. Customers are served by a network of relationship and industry sector specialist managers who provide local access to an extensive range of products and services, as well as offering business information and support. Customers are also offered access to business centres in continental Europe and to the products and expertise of other businesses in the Group.
The strategy to accelerate business growth is underpinned by the Value Aligned Performance Measurement (VAPM) system which is linked to targets and reward. VAPM helps demonstrate the additional value that is generated through the acquisition of new customers, together with the strengthening and the expansion of relationships with existing customers.
Barclays Africa
Barclays Africa provides banking services to personal and corporate customers in North Africa, sub-Saharan Africa and islands in the Indian Ocean. The portfolio comprises banking operations in Botswana, Egypt, Ghana, Kenya, Mauritius, Seychelles, South Africa, Tanzania, Uganda, Zambia and Zimbabwe.
Barclays is one of the leading international banks in the region serving 1.5m customers. The strategy is to develop and grow the franchise through the migration of products skills and processes from other parts of the Barclays Group.
66
Barclays Capital
Barclays Capital is the investment banking division of Barclays, providing corporate, institutional and government clients with solutions to their financing and risk management needs.
The Barclays Capital business model is distinctive. It focuses on a broad span of financing and risk management services in the interest rate, foreign exchange, commodities and credit markets combined with certain capabilities in equities. Activities are split between two areas: Rates, which includes fixed income, foreign exchange, commodities, emerging markets, money markets sales, trading and research, prime brokerage and equity related activities; and Credit, which includes origination, sales, trading and research relating to loans, debt capital markets, structured capital markets, and private equity.
Barclays Capital works increasingly with other Group businesses, including Barclays Private Clients, Business Banking and Barclays Global Investors, to provide a more integrated customer service and to develop business opportunities across the Group.
Barclays Global Investors
Barclays Global Investors (BGI) is one of the worlds largest asset managers and a leading global provider of investment management products and services. BGI offers structured investment strategies such as indexing, tactical asset allocation and risk-controlled active products such as hedge funds.
BGI also provides related investment services such as securities lending, cash management and portfolio transition services. Barclays Global Investors investment philosophy focuses on managing all dimensions of performance: return, risk and cost.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 67
Head office functions and other operations
Head office functions comprise all the Groups central activities, including Group Executive, Group Finance, Marketing and Communications, Human Resources, Group Strategy and Planning, Internal Audit, Marketing, Legal, Corporate Secretariat, Tax, Compliance and Risk. Central function costs incurred wholly on behalf of the business units are recharged to them.
Transition Businesses comprise discontinued South American and Middle Eastern corporate banking businesses and other centrally managed Transition Businesses. These non-core relationships are now being managed separately with the objective of maximising the recovery from the assets concerned.
Central items include internal fees charged by Barclays Capital for structured capital markets activities, income from the management of the Groups operational premises, property related services and other central items including activities which support the operating business and provide central information technology services.
Competition and outlook
The UK financial services market remains highly competitive and innovative. Competition comes both from incumbent players and a steady stream of new market entrants. Barclays remains at the forefront of market innovation to introduce new propositions to the market.
The landscape is expected to remain highly competitive in all our businesses. We are confident that the integrated business model employed by the Group, combined with rigorous application of managing for value principles, will stand the Group in good stead to meet the challenges ahead.
The Group believes that the UK domestic economy is likely to perform well relative to the rest of Europe. A strong pick-up in external economic conditions particularly from the United States should help to bolster economic activity in the UK further and encourage a modest recovery in the Eurozone.
Financial markets recovered somewhat from the very low points reached in 2002, also reflecting the global economic recovery. Interest rates in the US and UK bottomed out in the latter part of 2003, creating conditions for modest rises over the next 12 months.
Group structure
Within Barclays Private Clients, the contribution recognised from the closed life assurance activities is reported separately to provide increased transparency.
The Group identified certain non-strategic operations in the Middle East which were previously reported within Barclays Capital. These are now separately managed with the objective of maximising the recovery from the assets concerned. These operations, together with South American Corporate Banking, which was separately identified in 2002, and residual balances from other Transition Businesses, are collectively reported as Transition Businesses within Head office functions and other operations.
68
Changes in accounting presentation
In 2003, the SEC adopted regulations relating to the presentation of financial data which is not based on the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) applied by SEC reporting companies. These regulations are commonly referred to as Regulation G.
Barclays has in the past published both Group statutory financial statements, as well as Group and business further analyses which were designed to assist the understanding of underlying operating trends. In this Annual Report, Barclays presents its financial results solely on a GAAP basis.
As a consequence, goodwill amortisation, restructuring costs and costs directly associated with the integration of Woolwich plc are included in all presentations of Group operating expenses and operating profit, while the profit/(loss) from joint ventures and associates is taken into account below operating profit.
The analysis of results by business incorporates goodwill amortisation, restructuring costs, costs directly associated with the integration of Woolwich plc and profit/(loss) from joint ventures and associates in a manner consistent with the Group presentation detailed above. Additionally, exceptional items are now allocated out to individual businesses. This is a different treatment to that included in the Results Announcement where the analysis of results by business excludes goodwill amortisation and exceptional items, and separately identifies restructuring costs.
The prior period presentation has, where appropriate, been restated to conform with current year classification, and the change in accountancy policies discussed above.
Accounting developments in UK GAAP are described on pages 105 to 106 and those under US GAAP are described on pages 170 to 171.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 69
Financial ReviewOverview
Barclays is an international financial services group engaged primarily in banking, investment banking and asset management. In terms of market capitalisation, Barclays is one of the largest financial services groups in the UK. The Group also operates in many other countries around the world and is a leading provider of co-ordinated global services to multinational centres. Worldwide, the Barclays Group has over 2,900 branches and employs 74,800 people.
Our business is affected by global economic conditions generally, and particularly by conditions in the UK. The UK economy was stronger in 2003 than 2002, with the economy growing at 2.1%. There was a repositioning away from consumption towards corporate investment, government spending and a stronger trade balance. The US economy embarked on a vigorous recovery, with uncertainties about the strength and durability of the recovery diminishing. There are signs at last that the Eurozone economy may be stabilising.
As a financial services group domiciled in the UK, the majority of our earnings arise from the UK. We believe that our diverse portfolio of businesses provides a broad spread of earnings capabilities and offer greater resilience against exogenous events in any single geography.
The profitability of Barclays businesses could be adversely affected by a worsening of general economic conditions in the United Kingdom or abroad. Factors such as the liquidity of the global financial markets; the level and volatility of equity prices and interest rates; investor sentiment; inflation; and the availability and cost of credit could significantly affect the activity level of customers. A continued market downturn would likely lead to a decline in the volume of transactions that Barclays executes for its customers and, therefore, lead to a decline in the income it receives from fees and commissions. In addition, changes in interest rate levels, yields curves and spreads may affect the interest rate margin realised between lending and borrowing costs.
Continuous improvement in productivity provides the ability to respond flexibly to any pressure to income growth, which would help offset the impact on overall profitability.
Key drivers underpinning the financial performance are detailed in the subsequent pages of the Financial Review section. These include, for net interest income, the volume and rate of growth of asset and liability balances, together with the margin on these balances. Non-interest income is driven primarily by net fees and commissions and also comprises dealing profits and other operating income.
The principal drivers of expenses are staffing levels and their associated costs, performance related expenditure, the level of strategic investment spend and, in 2003, the move from a pension credit to a pension charge.
Provisions are driven by the quantity and quality of lending and reflect the condition of the credit environment.
In addition to the risk factors outlined on pages 98 to 99, other potential impacts on Barclays profitability are the consequences of potential regulation or legislation.
GoalsBarclays primary focus is to deliver superior value to its shareholders. To achieve this we use the principles of value-based management (VBM) to develop strategy, allocate resources and manage performance.
In applying VBM principles, Barclays has developed a disciplined fact-based approach to strategy development and business planning, which aims to build sustainable competitive advantage. Individual businesses generate alternative business strategies to facilitate the selection of the most appropriate value-maximising option, in order to achieve profitable growth in all our businesses.
We use performance goals as an integral part of our value-based management disciplines. These are designed to stretch the thinking and ambition of our businesses. Goals have been set for four-year periods to align with the planning processes described above. In 1999, we announced goals for the 2000 to 2003 period. This performance cycle has concluded and we commenced a new cycle for the 2004 to 2007 period.
At the end of 1999, Barclays set a series of four-year performance goals for the period 2000 to 2003 inclusive. The primary goal was to achieve top quartile total shareholder return (TSR) relative to a peer group of 11 other UK and international financial services institutions. TSR is defined as the value created for shareholders through share price appreciation, plus reinvested dividend payments.
For the four year period from 31st December 1999 to 31st December 2003, Barclays was positioned third within its peer group, thereby achieving its primary goal of top quartile TSR performance.
Barclays announced on 12th February 2004 its performance goals for the four-year period, 2004 to 2007 inclusive. Our primary goal, to achieve top quartile total shareholder return, remains unchanged from the prior goal period. The peer group is reviewed annually to ensure it aligns with our business mix and the scale of our ambition. The peer group for 2004 is: ABN Amro, BBVA, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Deutsche Bank, HBOS, HSBC, JP Morgan & Chase, Lloyds TSB, Royal Bank of Scotland and UBS.
In addition, secondary goals are used to support the pursuit of top quartile TSR, economic profit (EP) and productivity. Barclays operating philosophy is managing for value. The strategies we follow and the actions we take are aligned to value creation for all stakeholders. Since the introduction of VBM, Barclays has used economic profit as its key internal financial measure, to support the achievement of our primary goal, to achieve top quartile total shareholder return. Barclays uses this non-GAAP measure as a key measure of performance because it believes that it provides important discipline in decision making.Barclays believes that EP encourages both profitable growth and the efficient use of capital. More information on the reconciliation of EP to profit before tax can be found on page 205.
We believe that, given current and expected market conditions, a compound annual growth rate in EP in the range of 10% to 13%, which would translate into cumulative EP generation of £7.3bn to £7.8bn, will be required to deliver top quartile shareholder returns over the 2004-2007 goal period.
Another supporting goal relates to improved productivity. World class productivity is an important contributor to sustaining strong performance. All businesses are expected to meet or exceed top quartile productivity performance relative to comparable peers within their sector. Those already at top quartile cost:income performance are expected to deliver a 1% per annum improvement.
We will continue to report progress against goals on a regular basis.
70
Financial performance 2003
The Groups profit before tax in 2003 increased 20% (£640m) to £3,845m (2002: £3,205m). Operating income increased 10% (£1,084m) to £12,411m (2002: £11,327m) whilst operating expenses rose 9% (£629m) to £7,253m (2002: £6,624m). A third of the increase in operating expenses (£200m) was attributable to the move to a pensions charge (£128m) from a pensions credit (£72m) in 2002 in respect of the Groups main UK Pension schemes. Restructuring costs amounted to £209m (2002: £187m). Goodwill amortisation was £265m (2002: £254m). Provisions for bad and doubtful debts fell 9% (£137m) to £1,347m (2002: £1,484m). Provisions excluding the impact of Transition Businesses fell 3% (36m) to £1,324m (2002: £1,360m). Earnings per share rose 26% to 42.3p (2002: 33.7p).
Non-performing lendings decreased by £371m to £4,155m. Potential problem loans increased by £173m to £1,477m. Coverage of non-performing lendings increased from 68.0% to 74.1% while the coverage of total potential credit risk lendings increased from 52.8% to 54.6%.
Shareholders funds increased by £1,272m primarily due to profit retentions. Weighted risk assets increased by £16bn (9%) up to £189bn. The tier 1 ratio decreased from 8.2% to 7.9% while the total risk asset ratio remained at 12.8%. Total assets increased by £40bn to £443bn.
Personal Financial Services operating profit increased 13% to £816m (2002: £720m). Operating income was up 7% at £3,109m (2002: £2,919m). Stronger lending and deposit volumes and active margin management helped drive income momentum. Operating expenses rose 7% to £1,990m (2002: £1,865m), with almost two-thirds of the increase attributable to the pensions charge and higher strategic investment spend. Provisions decreased 9% to £303m (2002: £334m) as both the quality of the loan portfolio and risk processes improved.
Barclays Private Clients operating profit for the ongoing business decreased 16% to £270m (2002: £323m). Business activity was impacted by significantly lower average equity markets and by lower average interest rates than in 2002. Operating income fell 4% to £1,350m (2002: £1,401m). Operating expenses including goodwill of £58m (2002: £45m), increased 1% to £1,049m (2002: £1,041m). The contribution from the closed life assurance activities was a loss of £77m (2002: loss £87m).
Barclaycard operating profit increased 16% to £689m (2002: £593m), with strong business volumes driving income growth of 16% to £1,830m (2002: £1,582m). Operating expenses rose 16% to £679m (2002: 587m), reflecting strong growth in business volumes, increased marketing activity and higher strategic investment expenditure. Provisions increased 15% to £462m (2002: £402m).
Business Banking operating profit increased 8% to £1,299m (2002: £1,206m) reflecting loan volume growth and stable lending margins, the benefits of tight cost management and well controlled risk. Operating income grew 5% to £2,628m (2002: £2,514m) reflecting the impact of the implementation of the Competition Commission Inquiry transitional pricing remedy. Operating expenses of £1,080m (2002: £1,082m) were flat relative to 2002 and included cost savings realised in the back office.
Barclays Africa operating profit increased 27% to £112m (2002: £88m). Operating income was up 18% at £325m (2002; £275m) driven by strong lending growth in selected markets. Operating expenses rose 16% to £186m (2002: £160m). Provisions were steady at £27m.
Barclays Capital operating profit increased 35% to £782m (2002: £578m). Operating income grew 18% to a record £2,652m (2002: £2,238m), with secondary income up 17% and primary income up 16%. Operating expenses rose 22% to £1,618m (2002: £1,326m) and reflected increased business as usual costs from higher business volumes and headcount growth, performance-based revenue related costs and increased strategic investment spend. Provisions declined 25% to £252m (2002: £334m) reflecting continued improvements in the quality of the loan book and in the corporate credit environment.
Barclays Global Investors operating profit increased 84% to £180m (2002: £98m). Operating income, predominantly fees and commissions, rose 22% to £672m (2002: £550m) reflecting growth in assets under management, good investment performance and increased higher margin business. Operating expenses increased 9% to £492m (2002: £452m).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 71
Financial ReviewResults by Nature of Income and Expense
Results by Nature of Income and Expense
Comparative figures have been restated as a result of the changes in accounting policy and accounting presentation as set out on pages 105 and 106.
Net interest income
Group net interest income increased by 6% to £6,604m, reflecting growth in balances which more than offset a 14 basis point fall versus 2002 in the Group net interest margin to 2.61% (2002: 2.75%).
The Group net interest margin of 2.61% (2002: 2.75%) includes 0.48% (2002: 0.55%) arising from the benefit of free funds. A component of the benefit of free funds is the hedge against short-term interest rate movements. The contribution of the hedge in 2003 was 0.19% (2002: 0.22%).
Average interest earning assets increased by 12% to £253bn (2002: £225bn), primarily due to a £9bn increase in average loans and advances to customers, largely in Personal Financial Services, Barclaycard and Business Banking and an £18bn increase in average holdings of debt securities balances, predominantly in Barclays Capital.
Domestic average interest earning assets increased by 7% to £162bn (2002: £152bn), predominantly driven by the £5bn increase in Business Banking average lending balances and a £4bn increase in average mortgage balances in Personal Financial Services. International average interest earning assets increased by 23% to £90bn (2002: £73bn), primarily driven by an increase in Barclays Capital wholesale activities.
The 14 basis points fall in the Group net interest margin was primarily attributable to a fall in the international net interest margin and a change in the mix of both assets and liabilities.
The domestic net interest margin rose by 3 basis points to 3.64% (2002: 3.61%), reflecting active management of margins across the UK businesses in competitive market conditions. Net interest margin improved relative to 2002 in mortgages and consumer finance and remained stable in retail savings and corporate lending.
The reduction of 19 basis points in the international margin was mainly as a result of an increase in higher quality assets in Barclays Capital, the conversion to associate status of the Caribbean business, a change in the currency mix of the portfolio and the general fall in global interest rates.
Net interest income in 2002 increased by 4% to £6,205m (2001: £5,966), reflecting growth in the average interest earning assets by 10% to £225bn. This was primarily due to a £6bn increase in UK mortgage balances, £4bn increase in debt securities holdings and £5bn of lending to banks.
In 2002, overall banking margins were 16 basis points down on 2001 to 2.75%. The adverse impact on the margin was largely due to the low interest rate environment, the competitive market conditions in the UK, particularly in the mortgage market, an increase in the non performing loans in the US and the managing down of the higher yielding South American Corporate Banking business.
In 2002, the benefit of free funds fell 0.08% to 0.33% as a result of the reduction in interest rates. However, the overall benefit of free funds on a hedged basis rose to 0.55% reflecting an increase in the effective rate of the hedge more than offsetting the fall in the liability interest rate.
Prevailing average interest rates
Average interest earning assets and liabilities banking business
72
Yields, spreads and margins banking business(a)
The net interest income and average balances of the trading business are shown separately on the average balance sheet on pages 84 to 87.
Non-interest income
Net fees and commissions
Group net fees and commissions increased by £338m (9%) to £4,263m, reflecting increases in most businesses, partially offset by a reduction in Barclays Private Clients.
In Personal Financial Services, net fees and commissions increased 1% (£8m) to £802m (2002: £794m). Underlying this were good performances from fee-based current accounts and consumer finance, largely offset by continued weakness in the independent financial adviser (IFA) business.
In Barclays Private Clients, net fees and commissions decreased 13% (£79m) to £515m (2002: £594m). This reflected the impact of lower average equity market levels in 2003 on sales of investment products and on fund management fees, together with the absence of the contribution from the Caribbean business. The average level of the FTSE 100 Index was 12% lower than in the prior year at 4,051 (2002: 4,599). Fee income improved significantly in the second half of 2003, reflecting volume growth and the recovery in equity markets towards the year end. Average daily deal volumes in UK retail stockbroking, including Charles Schwab Europe, increased to 8,350 (2002: 6,300). The stockbroking business maintained its leading UK position with a 19% (2002: 12%) market share of client order business.
In Barclaycard, net fees and commissions increased 14% (£97m) to £793m (2002: £696m), as a result of higher cardholder activity and good volume growth within the merchant acquiring business.
In Business Banking, net fees and commissions increased 7% (£61m) to £925m (2002: £864m), driven by lending related fees which rose strongly, reflecting the growth in the balance sheet. Foreign exchange commission income grew due to increased business volumes. Money transmission income fell as a result of the alternative offer made in response to the Competition Commission Inquiry transitional pricing remedy and the targeted migration of transactions to electronic channels.
Net fees and commissions in Barclays Africa rose 17% (£19m) to £133m (2002: £114m), reflecting growth in fee-based services, treasury profits and the impact of the acquisition of BNPI Mauritius in 2002.
In Barclays Capital, net fees and commissions increased 16% (£74m) to £537m (2002: £463m), with good performances across the Credit businesses.
In Barclays Global Investors, net fees and commissions increased 23% (£124m) to £662m (2002: £538m), reflecting good income generation across a diverse range of products, distribution channels and geographies. The increase was largely driven by growth of investment management fees. These resulted from strong net new sales, growth in the sales of higher margin products, good investment performance and the recovery in equity markets towards the year end, which more than compensated for the adverse impact of foreign exchange translation movements. Actively managed assets now generate over 60% of management fees and over 50% of total income. Securities lending income growth was good, benefiting from higher volumes.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 73
In 2002, net fees and commissions increased by £188m to £3,925m (2001: £3,737), primarily due to the impact of replacing annual fees with fees based on account activity in Barclaycard and the strong performance from primary bonds and structured capital markets in Barclays Capital. Barclaycard and Barclays Capital contributed £696m and £463m respectively.
Barclays Private Clients and Barclays Global Investors contributed increases totalling £47m. Business Banking contributed an increase of £31m. In Barclays Africa, there was a £16m reduction principally due to the situation in Zimbabwe. In Personal Financial Services, there was a reduction of £12m reflecting lower income from independent financial advice.
Personal Financial Services, Barclays Private Clients and Business Banking fees and commissions included £135m (2001:£129m) in respect of foreign exchange income on customer transactions with Barclays Capital.
Dealing profits
Almost all the Groups dealing profits are generated in Barclays Capital.
Dealing profits grew 27% to £1,054m, driven by significant growth in client transaction volumes, particularly in continental Europe. The strong performances in the Credit businesses, principally in corporate bonds, were due to credit spreads tightening in the secondary bond markets. The growth in Rates related businesses reflected good results from equity related activities and money markets. Fixed income, foreign exchange and commodities continued to make good contributions.
Total foreign exchange income was £498m (2002: £496m) and consisted of revenues earned from both retail and wholesale activities. The foreign exchange income earned on customer transactions by Personal Financial Services, Barclays Private Clients, Barclaycard, Business Banking, Barclays Africa and Barclays Global Investors, both externally and with Barclays Capital, is reported in those business units, within fees and commissions.
Dealing profits in 2002 fell to £833m (2001: £1,011m). The fall resulted from poor conditions in the credit and equity markets with losses in the Credit businesses partially offset by good performances in Rates.
Other operating income
Other operating income increased by £126m (35%) to £490m (2002: £364m).
Premium income on insurance underwriting rose by £86m to £264m (2002: £178m) as a result of a good increase from consumer lending activities, a favourable claims experience and a one-off income gain of £43m resulting from an adjustment to insurance reserves.
Profits on disposal of investment securities primarily reflects realisations in the private equity business within Barclays Capital.
The substantial majority of the Groups long-term assurance activity is based in the UK. This UK business, which closed to new business following the Legal & General alliance in 2001, was the main contributor to the loss of £33m for 2003 and the losses experienced in 2002.
Income from the long-term assurance business reflects an investment gain compared to a loss in 2002 and increased income from the ongoing life business. These were partially offset by a reduction in the benefit of actuarial assumptions and other movements and the costs of redress for customers in respect of sales of endowment policies of £95m (2002: £19m).
Other operating income in 2002 decreased by 15% (£64m) to £364m (2001:£428m). This was primarily due to a loss of £51m (2001: income £127m) relating to the long-term assurance business mainly arising from the impact of stock market movements during the year.
This was partially offset by a revision of estimated amounts expected to be repaid on banking liabilities caused by the alignment of Woolwich to Barclays practice, (£59m). In addition, premium income on insurance underwriting increased by £20m and a restructuring of the loan portfolio generated a further £39m.
74
Administrative expenses staff costs
Staff costsStaff costs increased by 14% to £4,295m (2002: £3,755m).
Salaries and accrued incentive payments increased by 9% (£282m) to £3,441m (2002: £3,159m) reflecting increased performance related payments primarily within Barclays Capital and Barclays Global Investors.
Pension costs comprise all UK and international pension schemes. Included in the costs is the charge of £128m (2002: £72m credit) in respect of the Groups main UK pension schemes.
Permanent and contract staff numbers increased by 100 during 2003. The implementation of restructuring programmes resulted in a decrease of 4,400 staff. This was more than offset by an increase of 3,700 staff from the acquisitions of Charles Schwab Europe, Clydesdale Financial Services, Banco Zaragozano and Gerrard and the recruitment of an additional 500 staff in Barclaycard and 300 staff elsewhere.
Staff costs in 2002 were 1% higher than in 2001. Salaries and accrued incentive payments were broadly flat, with the impact of the UK annual pay award offset by a reduction in Group staff and payments to temporary staff. Increased costs in Barclays Global Investors were in line with improved performance and more than offset by a reduction in Barclays Capital.
Staff numbers(a)
Staff numbers
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 75
Administrative expenses other
Administrative expenses other rose by 4% (£92m) to £2,404m (2002: £2,312m). Property and equipment expenses increased by 11% (£108m) to £1,093m as a result of increased outsourced processing, information technology costs, and property repairs and maintenance.
Other administrative expenses were broadly flat at £1,311m (2002: £1,327m). Increases across a number of expense categories reflected higher business activity and were more than offset by reductions in a number of other categories including consultancy spend and other expenses.
In 2002, administrative expenses other were broadly flat at £2,312m (2001: £2,303m). Property and equipment expenses were £11m higher, reflecting higher external information technology costs.
Other administrative expenses reduced by £2m to £1,327m (2001: £1,329m). Increased advertising and market promotion expenditure, including costs relating to the launch of Barclaycard Direct, Openplan from Barclays and other campaigns, were offset by reductions in other areas.
Depreciation
Goodwill amortisation
Other goodwill amortisation increased in 2003, primarily as a result of the acquisition of Banco Zaragozano in July 2003.
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts
Provisions fell 9% (£137m) to £1,347m (2002: £1,484m). Provisions excluding the impact of Transition Businesses, mainly Argentina in 2002, fell 3% (£36m) to £1,324m (2002: £1,360m). The Groups provisions charge improved significantly to 0.73% (2002: 0.85%) of average banking loans and advances.
Provisions fell in Personal Financial Services with an improvement in the quality of the loan portfolio and improved risk management. The reduction occurred in the unsecured lending portfolio. Provisions for mortgages remained at a very low rate. Barclaycard provisions increased in line with continued portfolio growth.
While the specific provisions balance declined, the year-end general provision stock increased by 8% (£58m) to £795m (2002: £737m). Improvement in the credit quality of the portfolio as a whole was offset by portfolio growth, credit considerations relating to particular customer segments, and acquisitions, especially Banco Zaragozano.
In 2002, the net provisions charge for bad and doubtful debts increased by £335m to £1,484m. The greater part of this increase occurred in the Barclays Capital (£231m), reflecting difficult economic conditions in the telecommunications and energy sectors, particularly in the US. Provisions also increased in South American Corporate Banking mainly related to Argentina (£96m).
Bad debt provisions declined by 13% in Personal Financial Services reflecting in part improvements in risk management and grew in other businesses broadly in line with the growth in those portfolios.
76
Profit/(loss) from joint ventures andassociated undertakings
In 2003, the profit from associated undertakings for the year primarily relates to the investment in FirstCaribbean (including goodwill amortisation of £7m).
In 2002, the loss from joint ventures related primarily to an entity within Personal Financial Services. The loss from associated undertakings included a loss of £9m relating to FirstCaribbean integration and restructuring costs. It also included £1m relating to the amortisation of the goodwill arising on completion of the Caribbean transaction.
(Loss)/profit on disposal/terminationof Group undertakings
TaxThe overall tax charge is explained in the following table:
The charge for the year is based upon the UK corporation tax rate of 30% for the calendar year 2003 (2002: 30%). The effective rate of tax was 28.0% (2002: 29.8%). The decrease in the rate was primarily due to the beneficial effects of lower tax on overseas income, recognition of agreed capital gains tax losses and certain non-taxable gains, partially offset by the absence of tax relief on goodwill.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 77
Financial ReviewAnalysis of Results by Business
Analysis of Results by Business
The following section analyses the Groups performance within the businesses. Inter-business activities are included within these figures. The total income and expenditure for the businesses therefore does not necessarily equate to the amounts reported in the Groups results.
Personal Financial Services operating profit increased 13% (£96m) to £816m (2002: £720m), reflecting good income momentum, continued good cost control and reduced provisions.
Operating income increased 7% (£190m) to £3,109m (2002: £2,919m). Net revenue (operating income less provisions) increased 9% to £2,806m (2002: £2,585m).
Operating income growth was broadly based: general insurance rose 32%; consumer finance rose 15%; mortgages rose 10%; and current accounts and savings rose 2%. Income from independent financial advice fell 28%.
Net interest income increased 6% (£115m) to £1,949m (2002: £1,834m). Growth resulted from higher average product balances and improved asset margins. The retail savings margin remained stable.
Consumer finance experienced good growth in average balances, up 6% to £6.8bn (2002: £6.4bn), and improved margins. Sales of the key Barclayloan product were particularly strong, increasing 32%.
A significant part of the new consumer loan business was in the better risk grades.
Average savings balances increased 6% to £30.9bn (2002: £29.2bn), after transferring some balances to Barclays Private Clients in the second half of 2003. Excluding the impact of the transfer average savings balances increased 9% to £31.8bn (2002: £29.2bn). Barclays branded savings continued to perform strongly, growing 19%. This was a market leading performance driven by Openplan.
Average residential mortgage balances increased 8% to £59.0bn (2002: £54.5bn). The selective approach taken to certain sectors of the mortgage market has been maintained throughout 2003. Gross advances were £18.3bn (2002: £22.2bn), a gross market share of 7% (2002: 10%). Net lending of £2.0bn (2002: £6.9bn) represented a net market share of 2% (2002: 9%). UK residential mortgage balances ended the period at £59.8bn (31st December 2002: £57.8bn). The interest spread on new mortgage business increased.
Net fees and commissions increased 1% (£8m) to £802m (2002: £794m). Underlying this were good performances from fee-based current accounts and consumer finance, largely offset by continued weakness in the independent financial adviser (IFA) business.
Other operating income increased by 23% (£67m) to £358m (2002: £291m). This resulted from a strong performance in general insurance activities, reflecting increased sales of personal protection insurance products, and a more favourable claims experience. A one-off income gain of £43m arose through an adjustment to insurance reserves.
Contributing to the overall increase in operating income has been the continued success of Openplan. Customer numbers now total 2.6m (2002: 2m), with deeper customer relationships evident through significantly higher product penetration and income contribution than for non-Openplan relationships. The percentage of new to Group customers in Openplan has increased. Openplan from Barclays has attracted 1.25m customers (2002: 0.78m) across the UK. Product penetration was an average of 4.6 products per customer, well above the average of 2.6 outside Openplan. Annual customer income was £397, relative to £249 outside Openplan. Openplan from Woolwich customer numbers rose to 1.40m (2002: 1.21m) with average product penetration of 3.2 products per customer relative to 1.5 outside Openplan. Annual customer income was £311, relative to £165 outside Openplan.
Operating expenses rose 7% (£125m) to £1,990m (2002: £1,865m), with around half of the increase attributable to the impact of the pension charge of £40m (2002: credit £20m). Business as usual costs were tightly managed to improve operational efficiency, and staff numbers continued to decline. Headcount fell to 25,800 (2002: 27,200). Strategic investment spend increased. Integration costs associated with the Woolwich integration reduced to £50m (2002: £70m). Operating expenses included goodwill of £151m (2002: £151m).
Provisions decreased 9% (£31m) to £303m (2002: £334m), reflecting the overall quality of the lending portfolio, improvements to risk management processes and a reduction in problem loans. Coverage ratios improved. The loan to value ratio within the mortgage book on a current valuation basis averaged 40% (2002: 45%).
Personal Financial Services operating profit in 2002 was £720m (2001: £648m). Operating income was steady at £2,919m (2001: £2,909m).
78
Net interest income in 2002 was £1,834m (2001: £1,911m). Margin pressures, particularly within mortgages, were actively managed with increased balances mitigating some of the compression.
Net fees and commissions in 2002 were £794m (2001: £805m).
Other operating income in 2002 was £291m (2001: £193m). The contribution from payment protection income increased strongly (18%) to £171m (2001: £145m) reflecting consumer lending activities. An increase of £59m resulted from a revision of the estimated amounts expected to be repaid on banking liabilities in the light of experience since the Woolwich acquisition in 2000 and to align Woolwich with Barclays practice.
Operating expenses in 2002 fell 1% to £1,865m (2001: £1,886m) despite significant continued investment in infrastructure and the higher costs associated with increased business volumes.
Provisions in 2002 were £334m (2001: £375m) despite growth in lending balances. This primarily reflected the implementation of specific initiatives to improve the overall risk profile of our lending portfolio, particularly in relation to consumer loans and current accounts.
Barclays Private Clients operating profit for the ongoing business fell 16% (£53m) to £270m (2002: £323m). Barclays Private Clients profit before tax for the ongoing business including the contribution of FirstCaribbean and exceptional items, decreased 6% to £293m (2002: £313m).
Net interest income increased 2% (£16m) to £804m (2002: £788m). The increase reflected a resilient core banking performance, the continued success of Openplan in Spain and the inclusion of Banco Zaragozano, which together more than offset the absence of the contribution from the Caribbean business. Average customer deposits increased 5% to £41bn (2002: £39bn), including the transfer of some client savings balances from Personal Financial Services in the second half of 2003.
Excluding the impact of the transfer, average customer deposits increased 3% to £40bn (£39bn). Average loans increased 44% to £13bn (2002: £9bn). Margins remained broadly stable.
Net fees and commissions decreased 13% (£79m) to £515m (2002: £594m). This reflected the impact of lower average equity market levels in 2003 on sales of investment products and on fund management fees, together with the absence of the contribution from the Caribbean business. The average level of the FTSE 100 Index was 12% lower than in the prior year at 4,051 (2002: 4,599). Fee income improved significantly in the second half of 2003, reflecting volume growth and the recovery in equity markets towards the year end. Average daily deal volumes in UK retail stockbroking, including Charles Schwab Europe, increased to 8,350 (2002: 6,300). The stockbroking business maintained its leading UK position with a 19% (2002: 12%) market share of client order business.
Operating expenses increased 1% (£8m) to £1,049m (2002: £1,041m). The tight control of costs, together with the impact of the deconsolidation of the Caribbean business, fully mitigated the additional pensions charge of £28m (2002: credit £13m), the inclusion of costs relating to Banco Zaragozano and Charles Schwab Europe, and increased restructuring charges. Operating expenses included goodwill of £58m (2002: £45m).
Provisions decreased £6m to £31m (2002: £37m), reflecting the impact of the Caribbean transaction.
Total customer funds, comprising customer deposits and assets under management (including assets managed by Legal & General under the strategic alliance), increased £24bn to £109bn (31st December 2002: £85bn). This was due to the inclusion of funds relating to the acquired businesses of Charles Schwab Europe, Banco Zaragozano and Gerrard (which together amounted to £19bn), the impact of new business, favourable exchange rate movements and improved stock market levels. Customer deposits increased by £5bn to £44bn (31st December 2002: £39bn), reflecting the inclusion of Banco Zaragozano and savings balances of £1.9bn which were transferred from Personal Financial Services in the second half of 2003.
Sales of Legal & General life and pensions products have fallen in line with industry trends. Sales of funds and bonds were impacted by reduced customer demand for investment products.
Openplan in UK Premier attracted £1.1bn of new mortgage balances together with £1.3bn of additional savings in the year.
Income in Spain, excluding Banco Zaragozano, continued to grow significantly in 2003, increasing 22% (£32m) to £179m (2002: £147m). This reflected the continued success of Openplan mortgage products together with favourable exchange rate movements. 15,000 new customers were recruited to Openplan in Spain in 2003.
The first benefits of the integration of Banco Zaragozano were evident: sales of non-core assets totalling some £175m, representing 23% of the purchase consideration; progress has been made on the combination of Head office functions and technology integration; and Barclays products have been successfully launched into the Banco Zaragozano customer base. The majority of the restructuring costs will be borne in 2004 and 2005.
The contribution from the closed life assurance activities, a loss of £77m (2002: loss of £87m), comprises the embedded value of the closed Barclays Life fund and former Woolwich Life fund together with the costs relating to redress for customers in respect of sales of endowment policies. Of the loss of £77m in the Groups results, £42m is included within other operating income and £35m within net interest income.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 79
Total costs relating to customer redress in respect of mortgage endowment policies were £95m (2002: £19m).
Barclays Private Clients operating profit in the ongoing business in 2002 fell 16% to £323m (2001: £385m), due primarily to the weaker interest rate environment in 2002 and margin compression.
On 11th October 2002, the Caribbean businesses of Barclays and Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce were combined to form FirstCaribbean International Bank Ltd, and the interest in FirstCaribbean was accounted for as an associated undertaking thereafter.
Operating income from the ongoing business in 2002 decreased 2% to £1,401m (2001: £1,426m).
Net interest income from the ongoing business in 2002 decreased 9% to £788m (2001: £870m). The increased income generated from higher average customer deposits and average loans was offset by margin compression and the effects of lower interest rates.
Net fees and commissions from the ongoing business in 2002 increased 5% to £594m (2001: £567m) resulting from commission income associated with the regulated sales force which was previously offset against costs and borne within the life assurance fund.
Operating expenses in 2002 increased 4% to £1,041m (2001: £1,005m). Costs were tightly managed and were lower than 2001 when excluding the £72m (2001: £31m) of costs attributable to the change in treatment of the regulated sales force.
The loss of £87m from the closed life assurance activities in 2002 compared to a profit of £123m in 2001, was due to the impact of declining equity markets in 2002 in addition to one-off benefits in 2001 such as the gain of £45m from the Legal & General Strategic Alliance.
Barclaycard operating profit increased 16% (£96m) to £689m (2002: £593m).
Operating income increased 16% (£248m) to £1,830m (2002: £1,582m). Net revenue (operating income less provisions) increased 16% (£188m) to £1,368m (2002: £1,180m).
Net interest income increased 17% (£151m) to £1,037m (2002: £886m), due to good growth in UK average extended credit balances, up 14% to £7.4bn (2002: £6.5bn). Growth in new UK customers remained strong, up 27%, with 1,547,000 (2002: 1,218,000) recruited in the period.
Net fees and commissions increased 14% (£97m) to £793m (2002: £696m), as a result of higher cardholder activity and good volume growth within the merchant acquiring business.
Operating expenses increased 16% (£92m) to £679m (2002: £587m). The increase reflected higher business volumes and greater marketing activity. Strategic investment spend increased as Barclaycard enhanced operational capabilities. Operating expenses included goodwill of £33m (2002: £22m).
Provisions increased 15% (£60m) to £462m (2002: £402m), in line with the growth in lending.
Barclaycard International made a profit of £4m (2002: loss £14m) whilst maintaining significant ongoing investment in the existing businesses and launching into new markets. Income increased by 48% and average extended credit balances rose by 43%. The number of Barclaycard International cards in issue rose to 1.42m (2002: 1.28m).
Net interest income in 2002 increased 9% to £886m (2001: £815m). This was mainly due to good growth in average UK extended credit balances, up 9% to £6.5bn (2001: £6.0bn).
Net fees and commissions in 2002 increased 21% to £696m (2001: £577m), principally as a result of replacing UK annual fees with fees based on account activity.
Operating expenses in 2002 increased by 15% to £587m (2001: £511m). Included in operating expenses was goodwill of £22m (2001: £6m).
Provisions in 2002 increased 6% to £402m (2001: £381m) in line with the growth in average extended credit balances.
Business Banking operating profit increased 8% (£93m) to £1,299m (2002: £1,206m), as a result of good income growth, continued tight cost management and well-controlled risk. Operating income increased 5% (£114m) to £2,628m (2002: £2,514m). Net revenue (operating income less provisions) increased 4% (£91m) to £2,379m (2002: £2,288m).
80
Net interest income increased 2% (£39m) to £1,665m (2002: £1,626m). Average lending balances increased 11% to £47.0bn (2002: £42.3bn) and average deposit balances increased 5% to £46.2bn (2002: £43.9bn). Lending margins were maintained and lending growth was concentrated towards higher quality large and medium business customers. The impact of the Competition Commission Inquiry transitional pricing remedy and the lower interest rate environment contributed to lower deposit margins.
Net fees and commissions increased 7% (£61m) to £925m (2002: £864m), driven by lending related fees which rose strongly, reflecting the growth in the balance sheet. Foreign exchange commission income grew due to increased business volumes. Money transmission income fell as a result of the alternative offer made in response to the Competition Commission Inquiry transitional pricing remedy and the targeted migration of transactions to electronic channels.
Operating expenses of £1,080m (2002: £1,082m) were flat relative to 2002. Business as usual costs reduced, with cost savings from the back office more than offsetting the impact of the pension charge of £50m (2002: credit £26m). Headcount fell to 9,000 (2002: 9,700). Strategic investment spend increased, and was focused on improving direct channels, realising cost savings and enhancing the shared technology infrastructure. Operating expenses included goodwill of £9m (2002: £21m).
Provisions increased 10% (£23m) to £249m (2002: £226m). The increase was in line with lending growth. The lending portfolio remained well diversified by sector and the overall quality of the portfolio, as defined by risk grade, was maintained.
Business Banking operating profit in 2002 increased by 15% to £1,206m (2001: £1,049m) reflecting improved income growth and tight cost management.
Net interest income in 2002 increased 5% to £1,626m (2001: £1,553m) partly as a result of increased volumes.
Net fees and commissions in 2002 increased 4% to £864m (2001: £833m). Lending related fees increased strongly and included an increased contribution from leveraged finance. Money transmission income fell as a result of price competition and a reduction in average fee levels due to the migration to more efficient, lower cost, electronic payment mechanisms. Foreign exchange related income was flat despite a reduction in volumes.
Operating expenses in 2002 fell 4% to £1,082m (2001: £1,123m). Included in operating expenses was goodwill of £21m (2001: £12m).
Provisions in 2002 increased 8% to £226m (2001: £210m).
Barclays Africa operating profit increased 27% (£24m) to £112m (2002: £88m) driven by strong customer lending.
Operating income increased 18% (£50m) to £325m (2002: £275m).
Net interest income increased 17% (£27m) to £187m (2002: £160m), the growth being largely attributable to the acquisition of BNPI Mauritius and expansion in selected markets. There was a 20% increase in customer lending to £1.8bn (2002: £1.5bn) and a 12% rise in customer deposits to £2.8bn (2002: £2.5bn).
Net fees and commissions rose 17% (£19m) to £133m (2002: £114m), reflecting growth in fee-based services, treasury profits and the impact of the acquisition of BNPI Mauritius in 2002.
Operating expenses increased 16% (£26m) to £186m (2002: £160m), due to increased infrastructure investment, further development of the business and the relocation of Head office functions. Operating expense included goodwill of £1m (2002: £1m).
Provisions remained steady at £27m, notwithstanding strong lending growth, and reflected improved portfolio quality and recoveries.
Operating profit in 2002 decreased 28% to £88m (2001: £122m) primarily attributable to the situation in Zimbabwe.
Operating income in 2002 fell 12% to £275m (2001: £312m) primarily attributable to the situation in Zimbabwe.
Operating expenses in 2002 fell 3% to £160m (2001: £165m).
Provisions in 2002 increased 8% to £27m (2001: £25m).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 81
Barclays Capital operating profit increased 35% (£204m) to £782m (2002: £578m). This was due to very strong operating income growth and the improved credit environment. Revenue related costs increased with the strong performance.
Operating income increased 18% (£414m) to a record £2,652m (2002: £2,238m) and reflected broadly based growth across most of the product areas in Rates and Credit. Average DVaR rose 13%, to £26m (2002: £23m). Net revenue (operating income less provisions) increased by 26% to £2,400m (2002: £1,904m).
Secondary income, comprising dealing profits and net interest income, and which is primarily generated from providing client risk management and financing solutions, increased 17% (£290m) to £2,006m (2002: £1,716m).
Dealing profits grew 26% (£215m) to £1,042m (2002: £827m), driven by significant growth in client transaction volumes, particularly in continental Europe. The strong performance in the Credit businesses, principally in corporate bonds, was due to credit spreads tightening in the secondary bond markets. The growth in the Rates businesses reflected good results from equity related activities and money markets. Fixed income, foreign exchange and commodities continued to make good contributions. Net interest income grew 8% (£75m) to £964m (2002: £889m) due to balance sheet growth in higher quality assets, partially offset by margin compression. Corporate lending remained tightly managed and the credit portfolio continued to decline, with drawn credit balances falling to £7bn (31st December 2002: £10bn).
Primary income, comprising net fees and commissions, increased 16% (£74m) to £537m (2002: £463m), with good performances across the Credit businesses. Net fees and commissions included £89m (2002: £87m) of internal fees for structured capital markets activities arranged by Barclays Capital.
Other operating income increased to £109m (2002: £59m) as a result of a number of private equity and structured capital markets investment realisations.
Operating expenses increased 22% (£292m) to £1,618m (2002: £1,326m). Business as usual costs grew as a result of higher business volumes and increased front-office headcount. Revenue related costs increased due to the strong financial performance. Strategic investment spend increased as product and distribution development accelerated, particularly in the second half of 2003. The ratio of staff costs to net revenue improved to 53% (2002: 54%). There was no goodwill amortisation in 2003 (2002: £2m).
Provisions fell 25% (£82m) to £252m (2002: £334m). This reflected the ongoing improvement in the quality of the loan book and continued recovery in the large corporate credit environment.
Operating profit in 2002 fell 12% to £578m (2001: £654m), with good income growth offset by increased provisions, as difficult economic conditions affected specific sectors.
Operating income grew 7% to £2,238m (2001: £2,087m) reflecting the strength of the Barclays Capital business model and continued progress in building the client franchise. Secondary income increased 4% to £1,716m (2001: £1,645m) driven by strong net interest income. Primary income increased by 19% to £463m (2001: £389m) driven by the Credit businesses.
Operating expenses fell slightly to £1,326m (2001: £1,330m) as revenue related costs were reduced in line with performance. Included in operating expenses was goodwill of £2m (2001: £1m).
Provisions in 2002 were significantly higher at £334m (2001: £103m). The increase reflected difficult economic conditions (particularly in the US during 2002), primarily in the telecommunications and energy sectors.
82
Barclays Global Investors operating profit increased 84% (£82m) to £180m (2002: £98m) and reflected very strong top-line income growth and good control of costs.
Net fees and commissions increased 23% (£124m) to £662m (2002: £538m), reflecting good income generation across a diverse range of products, distribution channels and geographies. The increase was largely driven by growth of investment management fees. These resulted from strong net new sales, growth in the sales of higher margin products, good investment performance and the recovery in equity markets towards the year end, which more than compensated for the adverse impact of foreign exchange translation movements. Actively managed assets now generate over 60% of management fees and over 50% of total income. Securities lending income growth was good, benefiting from higher volumes.
Operating expenses increased by 9% (£40m) to £492m (2002: £452m), due to higher revenue related costs, partly offset by the impact of foreign exchange translation movements. Operating expenses included goodwill of £12m (2002: £13m).
Growth in income and costs was constrained by foreign exchange translation movements. Approximately 56% of Barclays Global Investors income was in US Dollars and 31% in Sterling.
Total assets under management increased 29% (£136bn) to £598bn (31st December 2002: £462bn). This growth came from £67bn of net new assets and £134bn attributable to market movements, offset by £65bn of adverse exchange rate movements. Assets under management comprise: £410bn (69%) indexed assets; £125bn (21%) active assets; and £63bn (10%) managed cash assets.
Barclays Global Investors operating profit in 2002 increased 48% (£32m) to £98m (2001: £66m) reflecting strong asset gathering, a greater proportion of higher margin active funds business, good investment performance across a range of products and ongoing cost management.
Fees and commissions in 2002 increased by 4% (£20m) to £538m (2001: £518m) despite significantly lower stock market levels. The increase reflected the continued expansion in the advanced active business and growth of Global iShares (Exchange Traded Funds).
Operating costs in 2002 fell by 1% to £452m (2001: £457m). Increased performance related pay was offset by improved efficiency and the impact of exchange rate translation movements.
Head office functions net costs increased 23% (£28m) to £149m (2002: £121m). This increase included a pension charge of £5m (2002: credit £4m).
The improved performance of Transition Businesses, from a loss of £119m to a loss of £25m, primarily reflected a reduced provisions charge of £7m (2002: £132m) in respect of various South American Corporate Banking exposures.
Central items include internal fees charged by Barclays Capital for sructured capital markets activities of £89m (2002: £87m). Central items increased from £58m to £84m, primarily reflecting a £16m increase in the centrally held information technology services costs.
Head office functions net costs increased in 2002 by 53% (£42m) to £121m. This increase relates primarily to £34m in increased expenditure related to marketing and central system costs, relative to 2001. The increased loss in the Transitional Businesses in 2002 relates to increased provisioning in South America Corporate Banking of £132m.
Central items in 2002 include internal fees charged by Barclays Capital for structured capital markets activities of £87m (2001: £61m).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 83
Financial ReviewAverage Balance Sheet
Average balance sheet and net interest income (year ended 31st December)
84
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 85
Changes in net interest income volume and rate analysis
The following tables allocate changes in net interest income between changes in volume and changes in interest rates for the last two years. Volume and rate variances have been calculated on the movement in the average balances and the change in the interest rates on average interest earning assets and average interest bearing liabilities. Where variances have arisen from changes in both volumes and interest rates, these have been allocated proportionately between the two.
86
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 87
Financial ReviewTotal Assets and Liabilities and Capital Resources
Total Assets and Liabilities
The Groups balance sheet grew by 10% (£40bn) to £443bn (31st December 2002: £403bn). Weighted risk assets rose by 9% (£16bn) to £189bn (31st December 2002: £173bn).
Within Personal Financial Services, total assets increased 4% to £77.3bn (31st December 2002: £74.6bn). Weighted risk assets increased by 3% to £42.4bn (31st December 2002: £41.1bn). This was mainly attributable to steady growth in UK residential mortgage balances, up 3% to £59.8bn (2002: £57.8bn) and to good growth in unsecured lending.
Barclays Private Clients total assets (including the assets of the closed life assurance activities) grew 52% (£7.7bn) to £22.5bn (31st December 2002: £14.8bn), primarily as a result of the growth of Openplan in Spain and the inclusion of assets relating to the acquired business of Banco Zaragozano. Weighted risk assets increased 29% to £15.1bn (31st December 2002: £11.7bn), largely reflecting the growth in Openplan assets in Spain and the impact of the acquisition of Banco Zaragozano.
Barclaycard total assets increased 15% to £12.5bn (31st December 2002: £10.9bn). Weighted risk assets decreased by 2% to £9.8bn (31st December 2002: £10.0bn), reflecting the effect of securitised credit card receivables.
Within Business Banking, total assets grew by 10% to £52.2bn (31st December 2002: £47.4bn). Weighted risk assets increased by 9% to £55.0bn (31st December 2002: £50.4bn) as a result of strong growth in lending balances. Lending growth was directed towards higher quality large and medium business customers.
Barclays Capital total assets grew 11% to £263.2bn (31st December 2002: £236.5bn) primarily due to increases in low risk, high quality reverse repos and debt securities. Reverse repo balances, which are fully collateralised, increased £17.1bn, driven by growth in client transactions. The increase in debt securities of £6.7bn arose primarily in governments and high-grade corporates. Total weighted risk assets increased 15% (£7.8bn) to £61.3bn (31st December 2002: £53.5bn), broadly in line with the growth in assets.
Capital Resources
The Group manages both its debt and equity capital actively. The Groups authority to buy back equity was renewed at the 2003 AGM to provide additional flexibility in the management of the Groups capital resources.
Total capital resources increased in the year by £2,201m.
Equity shareholders funds increased by £1,272m reflecting profit retentions of £1,404m, net proceeds of share issues of £149m, offset by share repurchases of £204m, exchange rate losses of £29m, shares to QUEST of £36m and £12m other movements.
Loan capital rose by £802m reflecting raisings of £1,926m, offset by redemptions of £974m, exchange rate movements of £146m and amortisation of issue expenses of £4m.
Capital resources for Barclays Bank PLC Group differ from Barclays PLC Group by £12m (2002: £4m).
Capital ratiosCapital adequacy and the use of regulatory capital are monitored by the Group, employing techniques based on the guidelines developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (the Basel Committee) and European Community Directives, as implemented by the Financial Services Authority (FSA) for supervisory purposes.
These techniques include the risk asset ratio calculation, which the FSA regards as a key supervisory tool. The FSA sets ratio requirements for individual banks in the UK at or above the internationally agreed minimum of 8%. The ratio calculation involves the application of designated risk weightings to reflect an estimate of credit, market and other risks associated with broad categories of transactions and counterparties. Regulatory guidelines define three Tiers of capital resources. Tier 1 capital, comprising mainly shareholders funds and including Reserve Capital Instruments and Tier One Notes, is the highest tier and can be used to meet trading and banking activity requirements. Tier 2 includes perpetual, medium-term and long-term subordinated debt, general provisions for bad and doubtful debts and fixed asset revaluation reserves. Tier 2 capital can be used to support both trading and banking activities. Tier 3 capital comprises short-term subordinated debt with a minimum original maturity of two years. The use of tier 3 capital is restricted to trading activities only and it is not eligible to support counterparty or settlement risk. The aggregate of tiers 2 and 3 capital included in the risk asset ratio calculation may not exceed tier 1 capital.
88
Capital adequacy data
The following table analyses capital resources at 31st December 2003, as defined for regulatory purposes:
Capital ratios
The growth in net capital resources of 9.2% (£2.0bn) was offset by the impact of 9.4% (£16.2bn) growth in weighted risk assets. The risk asset ratio was steady at 12.8% (31st December 2002: 12.8%). The Tier 1 ratio fell from 8.2% to 7.9%. The Equity Tier 1 ratio fell to 6.5% (2002: 6.6%).
Within total net capital, Tier 1 capital rose by £0.8bn primarily reflecting retained profits of £1.4bn and an increase in the deduction for goodwill of £0.4bn. Tier 2 capital increased by £0.9bn and Tier 3 capital by £0.1bn. Supervisory deductions decreased by £0.2bn.
Equity Tier 1 capital rose by £0.9bn.
The increase in weighted risk assets is primarily accounted for by a rise of 54.6% (£10.4bn) in the Trading book. Banking book weighted risk assets grew 3.8% (£5.9bn).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 89
Financial ReviewDeposits and Short-term Borrowings
Deposits
Average deposits (excluding trading balances) are analysed by type in the average balance sheet on page 85 and are based on the location of the office in which the deposits are recorded.
Demand deposits in offices in the UK are mainly current accounts with credit balances, obtained through the UK branch network.
Savings deposits in offices in the UK are also obtained through, and administered by, the UK branch network. Interest rates are varied from time to time in response to competitive conditions. These deposits are not drawn against by cheque or similar instrument.
Other time deposits retail in offices in the UK are interest bearing and also are not drawn against by cheque or similar instrument. They are generally distinguished from savings deposits by having fixed maturity requirements and from wholesale deposits by being collected, in the main, through the UK branch network.
Other time deposits wholesale in offices in the UK are obtained through the London money market and are booked mainly within the Groups money market operations. These deposits are of fixed maturity and bear interest rates which relate to the London inter-bank money market rates.
Other time deposits includes commercial paper and inter-bank funds.
Although the types of deposit products offered through offices located outside the UK are broadly similar to those described above, they are tailored to meet the specific requirements of local markets.
A further analysis of Deposits by banks and Customer accounts is given in Note 26 and Note 27 to the accounts on pages 129 and 130.
Short-term Borrowings
Short-term borrowings include Deposits by banks as reported in Deposits, Commercial paper and negotiable certificates of Deposit.
Deposits by banks (excluding trading business)Deposits by banks are taken from a wide range of counterparties and generally have maturities of less than one year.
Commercial paperCommercial paper is issued by the Group, mainly in the United States, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000, with maturities of up to 270 days.
Negotiable certificates of depositNegotiable certificates of deposits are issued mainly in the UK and US, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000.
90
Financial ReviewSecurities
Securities
The following table analyses the book value and valuation of securities.
Investment debt securities include government securities held as part of the Groups treasury management portfolio for asset and liability, liquidity and regulatory purposes and are for use on a continuing basis in the activities of the Group. In addition, the Group holds as investments listed and unlisted corporate securities. Investment securities are valued at cost, adjusted for the amortisation of premiums or discounts to redemption, less any provision for diminution in value.
Other securities comprise dealing securities which are valued at market value.
Bank and building society certificates of deposit are freely negotiable and have original maturities of up to five years, but are typically held for shorter periods.
A further analysis of the book value and valuation of securities is given in Notes 17 and 18 to the accounts on pages 124 and 125.
In addition to UK government securities shown above, at 31st December 2003 and 2002 the Group held the following government securities which exceeded 10% of shareholders funds.
Maturities and weighted average yield of investment debt securities
The weighted average yield for each range of maturities is calculated by dividing the annualised interest income prevailing at 31st December 2003 by the book value of securities held at that date. Yields on certain US securities, which are exempt from tax, have been calculated using interest income adjusted to reflect a taxable equivalent basis.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 91
Financial ReviewCritical Accounting Estimates
Critical Accounting Estimates
UK accounting standards require that the Group adopt the accounting policies and estimation techniques that the Directors believe are most appropriate in the circumstances for the purpose of giving a true and fair view of the Groups state of affairs, profit and cash flows. However, different policies, estimation techniques and assumptions in critical areas could lead to materially different results.
The following are estimates which are considered to be the most complex and involve significant amounts of management valuation judgements, often in areas which are inherently uncertain.
Bad and doubtful debtsThe estimation of potential credit losses is inherently uncertain and depends upon many factors, including general economic conditions, changes in individual customers circumstances, structural changes within industries that alter competitive positions, and other external factors such as legal and regulatory requirements and other governmental policy changes.
Specific provisions are raised when the Group considers that the creditworthiness of a borrower has deteriorated such that the recovery of the whole or part of an outstanding advance is in serious doubt.
For larger accounts this is usually done on an individual basis and all relevant considerations that have a bearing on the expected future cash flows are taken into account, for example the business prospects for the customer, the realisable value of collateral, the Groups position relative to other claimants, the reliability of customer information and the likely cost and duration of the work-out process. Subjective judgements are made in this process that may vary from person to person and team to team. Furthermore, judgements change with time as new information becomes available or as workout strategies evolve, resulting in frequent revisions to the specific provisions as individual decisions are taken, case by case.
Within the retail and small businesses portfolios which are comprised of large numbers of small homogeneous assets, statistical techniques are used to raise specific provisions on a portfolio basis, based on historical recovery rates. These statistical analyses use as primary inputs the extent to which accounts in the portfolio are in arrears and historical information on the eventual losses encountered from such delinquent portfolios. There are many such models in use, each tailored to a product, line of business or customer category. The models are updated from time to time. However, experience suggests that the models are reliable and stable, stemming from the very large numbers of accounts from which the model building information is drawn. These models do not contain judgemental inputs, but judgement and knowledge is needed in selecting the statistical methods to use when the models are developed or revised.
General provisions are raised to cover losses which are known from previous historical experience to be present in loans and advances at the balance sheet date, but which have not yet been specifically identified. These provisions are adjusted at least half-yearly by an appropriate charge or release of general provision based on statistical analyses, other information about customers and judgements by management and the Board.
In outline, the statistical analyses are performed on a portfolio basis as follows: For larger accounts, gradings are used to rate the credit quality of borrowers. Each grade corresponds to an expected default frequency and is calculated by using statistical methodologies and expert judgement. To ensure that the result is as accurate as possible, several different sources may be used to rate a borrower (e.g. internal model, external vendor model, ratings by credit rating agencies and the knowledge and experience of the credit officers). The general provision also takes into account the expected severity of loss at default, i.e. the amount outstanding when default occurs that is not subsequently recovered. Recovery is usually substantial and depends, for example, on the level of security held in relation to each loan, and the banks position relative to other claimants. Also taken into account is the expected exposure at default. Both loss given default and exposure at default are statistically derived values.
For the large numbers of retail accounts, the approach is in principle the same as for the corporate and business accounts. However, individual consideration of accounts is not practicable, and statistical methodologies are used to assess the loss in portfolios of accounts.
The general provision also includes a specifically identified element to cover country transfer risk calculated on a basis consistent with the overall general provision calculation.
In establishing the level of the general provision, management judgement is applied to the results of the statistical analyses. This is applied at business level where management takes account of the quality of the statistical analyses and the relevance of historical data used in the analyses to individual or groups of customers, current information, and the general economic and environmental factors mentioned above.
Further information on credit risk provisioning is set out on page 41.
Fair value of financial instrumentsSome of the Banks financial instruments are carried at fair value, including derivatives and debt securities held for trading purposes.
The fair value of a financial instrument is the amount at which the instrument could be exchanged in a current transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale.
Financial instruments entered into as trading transactions, together with any associated hedging, are measured at fair value and the resultant profits and losses are included in dealing profits, along with interest and dividends arising from long and short positions and funding costs relating to trading activities. Assets and liabilities resulting from gains and losses on derivative and foreign exchange contracts are reported gross in other assets or liabilities, reduced by the effects of qualifying netting agreements with counterparties.
Financial instruments are either priced with reference to a quoted market price for that instrument or by using a valuation model. Where the fair value is calculated using financial markets pricing models, the methodology is to calculate the expected cash flows under the terms of each specific contract and then discount these values back to a present value. These models use as their basis independently sourced market parameters including, for example, interest rate yield curves, equities and commodities prices, option volatilities and currency rates. Most market parameters are either directly observable or are implied from instrument prices. However, where no observable price is available then instrument fair value will include a provision for the uncertainty in the market parameter based on sale price or subsequent traded levels.
92
The calculation of fair value for any financial instrument may require adjustment of quoted price or model value to reflect the cost of credit risk (where not embedded in underlying models or prices used), hedging costs not captured in pricing models and adjustments to reflect the cost of exiting illiquid or other significant positions. The process of calculating fair value on illiquid instruments or from a valuation model may require estimation of certain pricing parameters, assumptions or model characteristics. These estimates are calibrated against industry standards, economic models and observed transaction prices. Changes to assumptions or estimated levels can potentially impact the fair value of an instrument as reported. The valuation model used for a particular instrument, the quality and liquidity of market data used for pricing, other fair value adjustments not specifically captured by the model, market data and assumptions or estimates in these are all subject to internal review and approval procedures and consistent application between accounting periods. Under US GAAP the unrealised gain or loss at the inception of a derivative contract is not recognised in the profit and loss account unless obtained using observable market data.
Certain financial instruments which are held on an accruals basis under UK GAAP are required to be measured at fair value under US GAAP. The Group does not manage its business with regard to reported trends on a US GAAP basis. Fair value adjustments to net income or other comprehensive income under US GAAP in current or past periods are not necessarily indicative of the magnitude or direction of such adjustments in subsequent periods.
The fair value of financial instruments is provided in Note 46 on pages 150 to 151.
GoodwillDetermining the period over which to amortise goodwill, where amortisation is applicable under GAAP, requires the assessment of its useful economic life. This assessment involves making judgements over the nature of the acquired business, the economic environment in which it operates and the period of time over which the value of the business is expected to exceed the values of net assets. As a starting point, businesses acquired which operate in more volatile economic environments, such as emerging markets, are considered to have a useful economic life of five years, in other cases 20 years is generally used.
Management also have to consider at least annually whether the current carrying value of goodwill is impaired. This is particularly important under USGAAP where goodwill is not being amortised. For the purposes of such impairment reviews, the goodwill is allocated to business segments that represent independent operating units. The first element of this allocation is based on the areas of the business expected to benefit from the synergies derived from the acquisition. The second element reflects the allocation of the net assets acquired and the difference between the consideration paid for those net assets and their fair value. This allocation is reviewed following business reorganisation. The carrying value of the operating unit, including the allocated goodwill, is compared to its fair value to determine whether any impairment exists. Detailed calculations may need to be carried out taking into consideration changes in the market in which a business operates (e.g. competition activity, regulatory change) into consideration. In the absence of readily available market price data this calculation is usually based upon discounting expected cash flows at the Groups cost of equity, the determination of both of which requires the exercise of judgement.
PensionsThe Group operates defined benefit pension schemes, details of which are given in Note 4 on page 115 and Note 60 on page 161. The pension cost for these schemes is assessed in accordance with the advice of a qualified actuary, using the projected unit method. Variations from the regular cost are allocated over the expected average service lives of current employees. Provisions for pensions arise when the profit and loss account charge exceeds the contribution to the scheme as a result of actuarial valuations. These provisions will be eliminated over the estimated service lives of the employees.
In determining this cost the actuarial value of the assets and liabilities of the scheme are calculated. This involves modelling their future growth and requires management to make assumptions as to, inter alia, price inflation, dividend growth, pension increases, earnings growth and return on new investment and employee lives. There is an acceptable range in which these estimates can validly fall. If different estimates within that range had been chosen, the cost recognised in the accounts could be significantly altered. The estimates used in the calculation of the 2003 pension credit are described on page 115.
Shareholders interest in the retail long-term assurance fundChanges in the net present value of the profits inherent in the in-force policies of the retail long-term assurance fund are included in the profit and loss account. In estimating the net present value of the profits inherent in the in-force policies, the calculations use assumed economic parameters (future investment returns, expense inflation and risk discount rate), taxation, mortality, persistency, expenses and the required levels of regulatory and solvency capital. The returns on fixed interest investments are set to market yields at the period end. The returns on UK and overseas equities and property are set relative to fixed interest returns. The expense inflation assumption reflects long-term expectations of both earnings and retail price inflation.
The risk discount rate is set to market yields on Government securities plus a margin to allow for the risks borne. The mortality, persistency and expense assumptions are chosen to represent best estimates of future experience and are based on current business experience. As with the pension calculation, there is an acceptable range in which these estimates can validly fall, and the income recognised in the accounts could be significantly altered if different estimates had been chosen.
TaxThe taxation charge in the accounts for amounts due to fiscal authorities in the various territories in which the Group operates includes estimates based on a judgement of the application of law and practice in certain cases to determine the quantification of any liability arising. In arriving at such estimates, management assesses the relative merits and risks of the tax treatment assumed taking into account statutory, judicial and regulatory guidance; and, where appropriate, external advice.
All of the Groups significant accounting policies, including those mentioned above, and information about the estimation techniques used to enable the accounting policies to be applied, are set out on pages 101 to 106.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 93
Financial ReviewOff Balance Sheet Arrangements
Off Balance Sheet Arrangements
In the ordinary course of business and primarily to facilitate client transactions, the Group enters into off balance sheet arrangements with unconsolidated entities. These arrangements include the provision of guarantees on behalf of the Groups customers, retained interests in assets which have been transferred to an unconsolidated entity and obligations arising out of variable interests in an unconsolidated entity.
GuaranteesIn the normal course of business, the Group issues guarantees on behalf of its customers. In the majority of cases, Barclays will hold collateral against the exposure, have a right of recourse to the customer or both. In addition, Barclays issues guarantees on its own behalf.
The main types of guarantees provided are financial guarantees given to banks and financial institutions on behalf of customers to secure loans, overdrafts and other banking facilities, including stock borrowing indemnities and standby letters of credit. Other guarantees provided include performance guarantees, advance payment guarantees, tender guarantees, guarantees to Customs and Excise and retention guarantees.
Further details on these guarantees are provided in Note 61 on page 187.
Special purpose entitiesThe off balance sheet arrangements entered into by the Group typically involve the use of special purpose entities (SPEs).
These are entities that are set up for a specific purpose and generally would not enter into an operating activity nor have any employees. The most common form of SPE involves the acquisition of financial assets that are funded by the issuance of securities to external investors, which have cash flows different from those of the underlying instruments. The repayment of these securities is determined by the performance of the assets acquired by the SPE. These entities form an integral part of many financial markets, and are important to the development of the European securitisation market and functioning of the US commercial paper market.
The consolidation approach to the SPEs is different under UK and US GAAP.
UK GAAP treatmentUnder UK GAAP the financial statements are required to present a true and fair view, which includes reflecting the substance of the transactions and arrangements and not just the legal form.
Accordingly, the substance of any transaction with an SPE forms the basis for the treatment in the Groups financial statements. When a Group company has transferred assets into an SPE, these assets should only be derecognised when the criteria within Financial Reporting Standard (FRS) 5 (Reporting the substance of transactions) are fully met.
An SPE is consolidated by the Group either if it meets the criteria of FRS 2 (Accounting for subsidiaries), or if the risk and rewards associated with the SPE reside with the Group, such that the substance of the relationship is that of a subsidiary. Financial data relating to entities consolidated on this latter basis is given in Note 58 on page 157.
US GAAP treatmentUnder US GAAP, the Group determines whether it has a controlling financial interest in an entity by initially evaluating whether the entity is a voting interest entity, a variable interest entity (VIE), or a qualifying special purpose entity (QSPE).
Voting interest entities are entities in which the total equity investment at risk is sufficient to enable each entity to finance itself independently and provides the equity holders with the obligation to absorb losses, the rights to receive residual returns and the right to make decisions about the entitys activities. Voting interest entities are consolidated in accordance with ARB 51. ARB 51 states that the usual condition for a controlling financial interest in an entity is ownership of a majority voting interest.
As defined in FIN 46 (Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities), VIEs are entities which lack one or more of the characteristics of a voting interest entity described above. FIN 46 states that a controlling financial interest in an entity is present where an enterprise has a variable interest, or a combination of variable interests, that will absorb the majority of the entitys expected losses, receive a majority of the entitys expected residual returns, or both. The enterprise with a controlling financial interest is the primary beneficiary under FIN 46. Accordingly, the Group consolidates all VIEs in which it is the primary beneficiary subject to the transitional requirements of FIN 46, as described in Note 61.
In accordance with SFAS 140 (Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities), the Group does not consolidate QSPEs. QSPEs are passive entities that hold financial assets transferred to them by the Group and are commonly used in mortgage and other securitisation transactions.
Prior to the adoption of FIN 46, the Group consolidated all non-qualifying SPEs if the Group controlled the SPE and held a majority of the SPEs substantive risks and rewards.
The Group, in the ordinary course of business, and primarily to facilitate client transactions, has helped establish SPEs in various areas which are described below, along with their UK and US GAAP treatment:
Commercial paper conduitsThe Group provides its clients with access to liquidity through the use of asset backed commercial paper programmes. These programmes involve the sale of financial assets by clients to entities which are, in effect, commercial paper conduits that then issue commercial paper to fund the purchases. The financial assets held by the conduits, which totalled £12,650m (2002: £16,090m) at 31st December 2003, normally take the form of consumer or trade receivables. Of the above amount, assets held by the conduits which have been originated by the Group amounted to £192m (2002: £318m) and have been reported on the Groups balance sheet under UK GAAP. The remainder represents client assets in which the Group has no interest and which are not reported on the Groups balance sheet at 31st December 2003. Certain administrative activities and the provision of liquidity and credit facilities to the programmes are performed by the Group under arms-length contracts that it, or the conduits independent board of directors, can terminate. Net fees received by the Group for performing these services amounted to £58m (2002: £40m). Under the US GAAP rules prior to the adoption of FIN 46, certain of these conduits are consolidated by the Group. This has minimal impact on net income, although assets increase by £2,845m (2002: £2,767m). The commitments to provide liquidity to these vehicles are a maximum of £12,650m, which would be required to be provided in the event of the conduits access to funding markets being restricted.
Further details of these transactions are provided in Note 61 on pages 183 and 184.
94
Credit structuring businessThe Group structures investments with specific risk profiles which are attractive to investors. This business involves the sale by the Group of credit exposures based on an underlying portfolio of assets into SPEs, often using credit derivative contracts. The assets are funded by issuing securities with varying terms. In accordance with UK GAAP, the Group does not recognise the assets and liabilities of these entities in its balance sheet once the securities that represent substantially all the risks and rewards associated with the SPE have been sold to third parties. Otherwise these are recognised in full. Under UK GAAP, as at 31st December 2003, the Group had recognised assets of £2,793m (2002: £3,493m) in respect of these transactions. The Groups net income for 2003 included a £38m profit (2002: loss of £3m) generated by the relationship with these entities. Under US GAAP, as at 31st December 2003, the Group had recognised assets of £2,750m (2002: £3,464m). The summarised results of these entities under UK GAAP are given in Note 58 on page 157.
Asset securitisationsThe Group assists companies with the formation of asset securitisations. These entities have minimal equity and rely on funding in the form of notes to purchase the assets for securitisation. The Group provides financing in the form of senior notes and/or junior notes and may also provide derivatives to the SPE. The Group has also used SPEs to securitise part of its retail lending portfolio and credit card receivables. Following the sale of the retail assets to the securitisation vehicles, the Group retains servicing rights and an interest in the residual income of the SPEs.
Under UK GAAP, the SPEs are consolidated as quasi-subsidiaries where the Group has the risks and rewards of the transaction. Under UK GAAP, as at 31st December 2003, assets of £4,716m (2002: £1,548m) were recognised. Where junior notes and certain derivative contracts are provided by the Group, the Group may be the primary beneficiary under FIN 46 and would be required to consolidate these. Under US GAAP, as at 31st December 2003, the Group had recognised assets of £5,344m (2002: £1,548m) in respect of these transactions. Certain of the entities used are QSPEs in accordance with SFAS 140 and, where this is the case, the securitised assets are deemed to have been sold. This results in the derecognition of assets of £2,350m as at 31st December 2003 (2002: £nil).
Further details are included in Notes 15 and 58 on pages 122 and 157.
Client intermediationThe Group is involved in structuring transactions as a financial intermediary to meet investor and client needs, These transactions involve entities structured by either the Group or the client and they are used to modify cash flows of third party assets to create investments with specific risk or return profiles or to assist clients in the efficient management of other risks. In addition, the Group invests in lessor entities specifically to acquire assets for leasing.
Client intermediation also includes arrangements to fund the purchase or construction of specific assets (most common in the property industry).
Under UK GAAP, where the Group has the risk and rewards, the SPEs are consolidated as quasi-subsidiaries, with assets of £5,740m as at 31st December 2003 (2002: £2,005m). Under US GAAP, assets of £5,697m were consolidated as at 31st December 2003 (2002: £1,906m).
Fund managementThe Group provides asset management services to a large number of investment entities on an arms-length basis and at market terms and prices. The majority of these entities are investment funds that are owned by a large and diversified number of investors.
In addition, there are various partnerships, funds and open-ended investment companies that are used by a limited number of independent third parties to facilitate their tailored private equity, debt securities or hedge fund investment strategies. These entities have assets under management of £290m (2002: £653m). The Group has acquired interests in these entities, which are included within debt securities or equity shares, but the entities are not consolidated under UK or US GAAP because the Group does not own either a significant portion of the equity, or the risks and rewards inherent in the assets. Some £32m (2002: £9m) of net income relates to transactions with these entities.
Further disclosure of the Groups involvement with entities of this and similar nature under US GAAP are given in Note 61 on pages 183 and 184.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 95
Other InformationEconomic and Monetary Union, International Financial Reporting Standardsand Supervision and Regulation
Economic and Monetary Union
Barclays is maintaining a prudent programme to validate and develop further its existing plans relating to the potential membership of European Monetary Union by the UK, and to conduct feasibility studies with selected suppliers and partners.
Barclays continues to take an active role via the British Bankers Association and other groups in industry-wide discussions, and maintains a dialogue with the regulatory community on UK Entry issues. It is also contributing to the further development of the Managed Transition Plan being authored by HM Treasury.
Given the considerable uncertainty that continues to surround whether and when the UK may enter, it has not been possible to draw any definitive conclusions as to the final overall cost of preparing the Groups systems and operations.
Barclays incurred minimal expenditure during 2003 with respect to any decision to introduce the euro in the UK.
International Financial Reporting Standards
By Regulation, the EU has agreed that virtually all listed companies must use International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) adopted for use in the EU in the preparation of their 2005 consolidated accounts. Barclays will have to comply with this Regulation. The objective is to improve financial reporting and enhance transparency to assist the free flow of capital throughout the EU and to improve the efficiency of the capital markets. Details of the Barclays implementation programme are discussed on pages 105 to 106.
Supervision and Regulation
UKThe Financial Services Authority (FSA) is the independent body responsible for regulating financial services in the UK. The FSA was established by the Government and it exercises statutory powers under the Financial Services & Markets Act 2000 (FSMA). Since 1st December 2001, the FSA is the single statutory regulator responsible for the regulation of deposit taking, life insurance and investment business.
In December 2001, HM Treasury announced that the powers of the FSA would be extended to include the regulation of mortgages and general insurance. There are two implementation dates, known as N(M&GI). From 31st October 2004, the FSA will regulate mortgage lending, sales and administration. From 14th January 2005, the FSA will regulate the sale and administration of general insurance contracts.
Under the FSMA 2000, the FSA is required to pursue four statutory objectives to:
Whilst carrying out these objectives, the FSA is also required to take into account a number of factors (principles of good regulation) including:
The FSA Handbook contains the rules and regulatory guidance applicable to the UK financial services industry. The Handbook consists of sourcebooks providing the basis of FSA requirements, guidance and processes to be followed. Since its first introduction, the Handbook has undergone revision and updating. New sourcebooks are being added to the Handbook to provide the rules for the regulation of mortgages and general insurance.
In its role as supervisor, the FSA is seeking to ensure the safety and soundness of financial institutions (in fulfilment of the first and third objectives above) with the aim of strengthening, but not guaranteeing, the protection of customers.
Barclays Bank PLC is authorised by the FSA to carry on regulated activities within the UK and is subject to consolidated supervision. The FSAs continuing supervision of financial institutions authorised by it is conducted through a variety of regulatory tools, including the collection of information from statistical and prudential returns, reports obtained from skilled persons, visits to firms and regular meetings with management to discuss issues such as performance, risk management and strategy.
Under the FSAs risk-based approach to supervision, the starting point for the FSAs supervision of all financial institutions is based on a systematic analysis of the risk profile for each authorised firm. The FSA has adopted a homogeneous risk, processes and resourcing model in its approach to its supervisory responsibilities (known as the ARROW model) and the results of the risk assessment will be used by the FSA to develop a risk mitigation programme for a firm. The FSA also promulgates requirements that banks and other financial institutions are required to meet on matters such as capital adequacy (see Capital Resources on page 88), limits on large exposures to individual entities and groups of closely connected entities, and liquidity.
Banks, insurance companies and other financial institutions in the UK are subject to a single financial services compensation scheme (the Financial Services Compensation Scheme) where an authorised firm is unable or is likely to be unable to meet claims made against it due to its financial circumstances. This single scheme replaces a number of pre-FSA schemes, including the Deposit Protection Scheme, the Investors Compensation Scheme and the Policyholders Protection Scheme.
96
Other InformationSupervision and Regulation
Eligible claimants under the Financial Services Compensation Scheme may make claims against the Scheme in the event of an authorised firms default and may receive compensation if their claim is a protected claim. Different levels of compensation are available to eligible claimants depending upon whether the protected claim is in relation to a deposit, a contract of insurance or protected investment business. The manager of the Scheme is able to make an offer of compensation or, in respect of insurance contracts, offer to continue cover or provide assistance to an insurance undertaking to allow it to continue insurance business in accordance with the rules of the Scheme. Most deposits made with branches of Barclays Bank PLC within the European Economic Area (EEA) which are denominated in sterling or other EEA currencies (including the euro) are covered by the Scheme. Most claims made in respect of designated investment business will also be protected claims if the business was carried on from the UK or from a branch of the bank or investment firm in another EEA member state. The Scheme establishes the maximum amounts of compensation payable in respect of protected claims: for eligible protected deposit claims, this is £31,700 (100% of the first £2,000 and 90% of the next £33,000) and for protected investment business, this is £48,000 (100% of the first £30,000 and 90% of the next £20,000). There is no maximum limit for protected insurance claims. The first £2,000 of a valid claim is paid in full together with 90% of the remaining loss.
The UK has implemented the minimum requirements imposed by the European Community Directives on such matters as the carrying on the business of credit institutions and investment firms, capital adequacy, own funds and large exposures. These form part of the European Single Market programme, an important feature of which is the framework for the regulation of authorised firms. This framework is designed to enable a credit institution or investment firm authorised in one European Union member state to conduct banking or investment business through the establishment of branches or by the provision of services on a cross-border basis in other member states without the need for local authorisation. Many of these Directives are being amended to reflect changes in the market and further European Community Directives are planned including in the areas of distance marketing, market abuse and insurance regulation are to be implemented, which once in effect, will further shape and influence the UK regulatory agenda.
With effect from February 2003, the Group became subject to The Proceeds of Crime Act 2002 which further strengthens the law with regard to anti-money laundering. Additionally, new Money Laundering Regulations came into effect on 1st March 2004. These replace the 1993 Regulations and will be supported by the recently revised Joint Money Laundering Steering Group Guidance Notes.
Formal consultation is a key aspect of the UK Governments reform programme and the Group has been reviewing and, where relevant, commenting on proposals both directly and through industry associations.
The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision and the European Commission have also issued consultation papers designed to replace the existing framework for the allocation of regulatory capital for credit risk and to introduce a capital adequacy requirement for operational risk. These bodies recognise that a more sophisticated approach is required to address both financial innovation and the increasingly complex risks faced by financial institutions. The revised Basel Capital Accord and the EU Risk Based Capital Directive are not currently expected to be implemented until the end of 2006.
Rest of the WorldIn the United States, Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and certain US subsidiary undertakings, branches and agencies of the Bank are subject to a comprehensive regulatory structure, involving numerous statutes, rules and regulations, including the International Banking Act of 1978, the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended, the Foreign Bank Supervision Enhancement Act of 1991 and the USA PATRIOT Act of 2001. Such laws and regulations impose limitations on the types of businesses, and the ways in which they may be conducted, in the United States and on the location and expansion of banking business there. The securities and investment management activities conducted in the United States are also subject to a comprehensive scheme of regulation under the US federal securities laws, as enforced by the Securities and Exchange Commission.
Barclays operates in many other countries and its overseas offices subsidiary and associated undertakings are subject to reserve and reporting requirements and controls imposed by the relevant central banks and regulatory authorities.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 97
Other InformationRisk Factors
Risk Factors
This document contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended and section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to certain of the Groups plans and its current goals and expectations relating to its future financial condition and performance.
The Group may also make forward-looking statements in other written materials, including other documents filed with or furnished to the SEC. In addition, the Groups senior management may make forward-looking statements orally to analysts, investors, representatives of the media and others. In particular, among other statements, certain statements in the Financial Review and Business Description with regard to management objectives, trends in results of operations, margins, costs, return on equity, risk management, and competition are forward looking in nature. These forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical or current facts. Forward-looking statements often use words such as anticipate, target, expect, estimate, intend, plan, goal, believe, or other words of similar meaning.
By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend on circumstances that will occur in the future. The Groups actual future results may differ materially from those set out in the Groups forward-looking statements. There are many factors that could cause actual results and developments to differ materially from those expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. Any forward-looking statements made by or on behalf of the Group speak only as of the date they are made. Barclays does not undertake to update forward-looking statements to reflect any changes in the Groups expectations with regard thereto or any changes in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statement is based. The reader should, however, consult any additional disclosures Barclays may make in documents it files with the SEC.
The following discussion sets forth certain risk factors that the Group believes could cause its actual future results to differ materially from expected results. The discussion also acknowledges a risk factor specific to the Groups ability to achieve its primary goal for 2004 to 2007 inclusive. The reader should also note the references to liquidity risk (page 54) and non-financial, compliance, legal and tax risk (page 58). However, other factors could also adversely affect the Group results and the reader should not consider the factors discussed in this report to be a complete set of all potential risks and uncertainties.
Business conditions and general economyThe profitability of Barclays businesses could be adversely affected by a worsening of general economic conditions in the United Kingdom or abroad. Factors such as the liquidity of the global financial markets, the level and volatility of equity prices and interest rates, investor sentiment, inflation, and the availability and cost of credit could significantly affect the activity level of customers. A market downturn would likely lead to a decline in the volume of transactions that Barclays executes for its customers and, therefore, lead to a decline in the income it receives from fees and commissions.
A market downturn or worsening of the economy could cause the Group to incur mark to market losses in its trading portfolios. A market downturn also could potentially result in a decline in the fees Barclays earns for managing assets. For example, a higher level of domestic or foreign interest rates or a downturn in trading markets could affect the flows of assets under management. An economic downturn or significantly higher interest rates could adversely affect the credit quality of Barclays on balance sheet and off balance sheet assets by increasing the risk that a greater number of the Groups customers would be unable to meet their obligations.
Credit riskThe Groups provisions for credit losses provide for losses inherent in loans and advances. Estimating potential losses is inherently uncertain and depends on many factors, including general economic conditions, rating migration, structural changes within industries that alter competitive positions, and other external factors such as legal and regulatory requirements.
Market risksThe most significant market risks the Group faces are interest rate, foreign exchange and bond and equity price risks. Changes in interest rate levels, yield curves and spreads may affect the interest rate margin realised between lending and borrowing costs. Changes in currency rates, particularly in the sterling-dollar and sterling-euro exchange rates, affect the value of assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies and affect earnings reported by the Groups non-UK subsidiaries and may affect revenues from foreign exchange dealing. The performance of financial markets may cause changes in the value of the Groups investment and trading portfolios and in the amount of revenues generated from assets under management. The Group has implemented risk management methods to mitigate and control these and other market risks to which the Group is exposed. However, it is difficult to predict with accuracy changes in economic or market conditions and to anticipate the effects that such changes could have on the Groups financial performance and business operations. In addition, the value of assets held in the Groups pension and long-term assurance funds are also affected by the performance.
Non-financial risksThe Groups businesses are dependent on the ability to process a large number of transactions efficiently and accurately. Non-financial risk and losses can result from fraud, errors by employees, failure to properly document transactions or to obtain proper internal authorisation, failure to comply with regulatory requirements and Conduct of Business rules, equipment failures, natural disasters or the failure of external systems, for example, the Groups suppliers or counterparties. Although the Group has implemented risk controls and loss mitigation actions, and substantial resources are devoted to developing efficient procedures and to staff training, it is only possible to be reasonably, but not absolutely, certain that such procedures will be effective in controlling each of the non-financial risks faced by the Group.
98
Changes in governmental policy and regulationThe Groups businesses and earnings can be affected by the fiscal or other policies that are adopted by various regulatory authorities of the UK, other European Union, foreign governments and international agencies. The nature and impact of future changes in such policies are not predictable and are beyond the Groups control. Areas where changes could have an impact include, inter alia:
Impact of strategic decisions taken by the GroupThe Group devotes substantial management and planning resources to the development of strategic plans for organic growth and identification of possible acquisitions, supported by substantial expenditure to generate growth in customer business. If these strategic plans do not meet with success, the Groups earnings could grow more slowly or decline.
CompetitionThe UK and global financial services market remains highly competitive and innovative competition comes both from incumbent players and a steady stream of new market entrants. The landscape is expected to remain highly competitive in all the Groups businesses, which could adversely affect the Groups profitability.
Impact of external factors on the Group and peer groupThe Groups primary performance goal is to achieve top quartile TSR performance for 2004 to 2007 inclusive against a group of peer financial institutions. This goal assumes that external factors will impact all peer group entities equally. The Groups ability to achieve the goal will be significantly impacted if the Group is disproportionately impacted by negative external factors. Even if the Group performs well, if others perform better or the market believes others have performed better, we may not achieve our goal.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 99
Auditors Report
US audit report of the independent auditors to the Board of Directors and shareholders of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC
We have audited the accompanying consolidated financial statements of Barclays PLC and its subsidiary undertakings on pages 101 to 190 and Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiary undertakings on pages 195 to 202. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Companys management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Barclays PLC and its subsidiary undertakings and Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiary undertakings at 31st December 2003 and 2002, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31st December 2003 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom.
Accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom vary in certain significant respects from accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Information relating to the nature and effect of such differences is presented in Note 61 to the consolidated financial statements.
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLPChartered Accountants and Registered AuditorsLondon, United Kingdom, 11th February 2004
100
Consolidated Accounts Barclays PLCAccounting Policies
Accounting PoliciesSummary of significant accounting policies
(a) Accounting conventionThe accounts have been prepared under the historical cost convention, as modified by the revaluation of certain assets held for dealing purposes, assets held in the long-term assurance business and the investment in Barclays Bank PLC in the balance sheet of Barclays PLC. They are prepared in accordance with applicable accounting standards of the UK Accounting Standards Board (ASB) and pronouncements of its Urgent Issues Task Force (UITF) and with the Statements of Recommended Accounting Practice (SORPs) issued by the British Bankers Association (BBA) and the Finance and Leasing Association (FLA).
The SORP issued by the Association of British Insurers (ABI) addresses the accounting and disclosure of insurance business for insurance undertakings. Barclays is primarily a banking group, not an insurance group, and prepares accounts in accordance with Schedule 9 of the Companies Act. The ABI SORP does not specifically address the accounting for long-term assurance business in this context. In line with other such banking groups, Barclays uses the embedded value method to measure the shareholders interest in its long-term assurance business, which is consistent with the alternative measurement method described in guidance issued by the ABI Supplementary Reporting for Long-Term Insurance Business and is considered more relevant than the modified statutory solvency basis for describing the financial position and current performance of the business.
Changes to the accounting policies described in the 2002 Annual Report are set out on page 105.
(b) Consolidation and formatThe consolidated accounts have been prepared in compliance with Sections 230, 255, 255A and 255B of, and Schedule 9 to, the Companies Act 1985 (the Act). The profit and loss account and balance sheet of Barclays PLC have been prepared in compliance with Section 226 of, and Schedule 4 to, the Act.
The consolidated accounts include the accounts of Barclays PLC and its subsidiary undertakings made up to 31st December. Entities that do not qualify as subsidiaries but which give rise to benefits that are, in substance, no different from those that would arise were the entity a subsidiary, are included in the consolidated accounts. Details of the principal subsidiary undertakings are given in Note 43. In order to reflect the different nature of the shareholders and policyholders interests in the retail long-term assurance business, the value of the long-term assurance business attributable to shareholders is included in Other Assets and the assets and liabilities attributable to policyholders are classified under separate headings in the consolidated balance sheet.
As the consolidated accounts include partnerships where a Group member is a partner, advantage has been taken of the exemption given by Regulation 7 of the Partnerships and Unlimited Companies (Accounts) Regulations 1993 with regard to the preparation and filing of individual partnership accounts.
(c) Shares in subsidiary undertakingsBarclays PLCs investment in Barclays Bank PLC, together with Barclays Bank PLCs investments in subsidiary undertakings, are stated at the amount of the underlying net asset, including attributable goodwill. Changes in the value of the net assets are accounted for as movements in the revaluation reserve.
(d) Interests in associated undertakings and joint venturesAn associated undertaking generally is one in which the Groups interest is more than 20% and no more than 50% and where the Group exercises a significant influence over the entitys operating and financial policies. A joint venture is one where the Group holds an interest on a long-term basis and which is jointly controlled by the Group and one or more other parties. The profit and loss account includes income from interests in associated undertakings and joint ventures based on accounts made up to dates not earlier than three months before the balance sheet date. Interests in associated undertakings and joint ventures are included in the consolidated balance sheet at the Groups share of the book value of the net assets of the undertakings concerned plus unamortised goodwill arising on the acquisition of the interest.
(e) GoodwillGoodwill may arise on the acquisition of subsidiary and associated undertakings and joint ventures. It represents the excess of cost over fair value of the Groups share of net assets acquired.
In accordance with Financial Reporting Standard (FRS) 10, goodwill is capitalised as an intangible asset and amortised through the profit and loss account over its expected useful economic life. For acquisitions prior to 1st January 1998, the Group accounting policy had been to write off goodwill directly to reserves. The transitional arrangements of FRS 10 allow this goodwill to remain eliminated. In the event of a subsequent disposal, any goodwill previously charged directly against reserves prior to FRS 10 will be written back and reflected in the profit and loss account.
The useful economic life of the goodwill is determined at the time of the acquisition giving rise to it by considering the nature of the acquired business, the economic environment in which it operates and period of time over which the value of the business is expected to exceed the values of the identifiable net assets. For acquisitions in less mature economic environments, goodwill is generally considered to have a useful economic life of five years. For all other acquisitions, goodwill is generally expected to have a useful economic life of 20 years. In all cases, goodwill is amortised over its useful economic life and is subject to regular review as set out in policy (k).
For the purpose of calculating goodwill, fair values of acquired assets and liabilities are determined by reference to market values, where available, or by reference to the current price at which similar assets could be acquired or similar obligations entered into, or by discounting expected future cash flows to present value. This discounting is either performed using market rates or by using risk-free rates and risk-adjusted expected future cash flows.
(f) Foreign currenciesAssets and liabilities in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at rates of exchange ruling on the balance sheet date. Overseas profits and losses are translated into sterling at average rates of exchange for the year. Profits arising in areas experiencing hyperinflation are adjusted to recognise its effect on the worth of the working capital employed. Exchange differences arising from the application of closing rates of exchange to the opening net assets held overseas, to the retranslation of the result for the year from the average rate to the closing rate and to related foreign currency borrowings are taken directly to reserves. All other exchange profits and losses, which arise from normal trading activities, are included in the profit and loss account.
(g) Shareholders interest in the retail long-term assurance fundThe value of the shareholders interest in the Groups retail long-term assurance business represents an estimate of the net present value of the
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 101
profits inherent in the in-force policies, based on the advice of qualified actuaries, together with the surplus retained within the long-term assurance funds. This value is calculated after tax. Changes in the value placed on the long-term assurance business attributable to shareholders are included in the profit and loss account.
For the purpose of presentation, the change in value is grossed up at the effective rate of corporation tax.
In estimating the net present value of the profits inherent in the in-force policies, the calculations use assumed economic parameters (future investment returns, expense inflation and risk discount rate), taxation, mortality, persistency, expenses and the required levels of regulatory and solvency capital. Each of these assumptions is reviewed annually. The returns on fixed interest investments are set to market yields at the period end. The returns on UK and overseas equities and property are set to fixed interest returns plus a margin to reflect the additional return expected on each of these investments. The calculations are based on the market value of assets at the period end. The expense inflation assumption is based on long-term expectations of both earnings and retail price inflation. The risk discount rate is set to market yields on Government securities plus a margin to allow for the risks borne. The mortality, persistency and expense assumptions are chosen to represent best estimates of future experience and are based on current business experience. No credit is taken for favourable changes in experience unless it is reasonably certain to be delivered. The projected tax charges and the required levels of regulatory and solvency capital are based on current legislation.
(h) Revenue recognitionInterest income is recognised in the profit and loss account as it accrues, with the exception of interest on non-performing loans as set out in accounting policy (l) below.
Fee income relating to loans and advances is recognised in the profit and loss account to match the cost of providing a continuing service, together with a reasonable profit margin. Where a fee is charged in lieu of interest, it is recognised in the profit and loss account as interest receivable on a level yield basis over the life of the advance. Fees and commissions receivable in respect of all other services provided are recognised in the profit and loss account when the related services are performed and when considered recoverable.
Income arises from the margins which are achieved through market-making and customer business and from changes in market value caused by movements in interest and exchange rates, equity prices and other market variables. Trading positions are valued on a mark to market basis. The resulting income is included in dealing profits along with interest and dividends arising from long and short positions and funding costs relating to trading activities.
(i) Lending related fees and commissions payable and incentivesFees and commissions payable to introducers in respect of obtaining certain lending business, where this is the primary form of distribution, are charged to the profit and loss account as fees and commissions payable, over the anticipated life of the loans.
The costs of mortgage incentives, which comprise cashbacks and interest discounts, are charged to the profit and loss account as a reduction to interest receivable as incurred.
The amount of a fee payable by a borrower representing an insurance premium, in respect of high loan to value UK residential secured loans is deferred and included in accruals and deferred income in the Group balance sheet. Following regular reviews of the amount of deferred
income required to cover anticipated losses in respect of this lending, deferred income is released to the profit and loss account on an annual basis.
(j) DepreciationTangible fixed assets are depreciated on a straight-line basis over their useful economic lives at the following annual rates:
Note
The Group selects its depreciation rates carefully and reviews them regularly to take account of any changes in circumstances. When setting useful economic lives, the principal factors the Group takes into account are the expected rate of technological developments, expected market requirements for the equipment and the intensity at which the assets are expected to be used.
No depreciation is provided on freehold land.
(k) ImpairmentTangible fixed assets and goodwill are subject to impairment review in accordance with FRS 11 if there are events or changes in circumstances that indicate that the carrying amount of the fixed asset or goodwill may not be fully recoverable. The impairment review comprises a comparison of the carrying amount of the fixed asset or goodwill with its recoverable amount, which is the higher of net realisable value and value in use. Net realisable value is calculated by reference to the amount at which the asset could be disposed of. Value in use is calculated by discounting the expected future cash flows obtainable as a result of the assets continued use, including those resulting from its ultimate disposal, at a market based discount rate on a pre-tax basis. The carrying values of fixed assets and goodwill are written down by the amount of any impairment and this loss is recognised in the profit and loss account in the period in which it occurs. If the occurrence of an external event gives rise to a reversal of an impairment loss, the reversal is recognised in the profit and loss account and by increasing the carrying amount of the fixed asset or goodwill in the period in which it occurs. The carrying amount of the fixed asset or goodwill will only be increased up to the amount that it would have been had the original impairment not occurred. For the purpose of conducting impairment reviews, income generating units are identified as groups of assets, liabilities and associated goodwill that generate income that is largely independent of other income streams. The assets and liabilities include those directly involved in generating the income and an appropriate proportion of those used to generate more than one income stream.
(l) Loans and advancesLoans and advances, other than those held in a dealing portfolio, are recorded in the balance sheet at cost, less interest in suspense debited to the customers account, specific and general provisions. Advances held in a dealing portfolio for the purpose of trading on a secondary market are valued at the lower of cost and market value.
102
Specific provisions are raised when the Group considers that the creditworthiness of a borrower has deteriorated such that the recovery of the whole or part of an outstanding advance is in serious doubt. Typically, this is done on an individual basis, although scope exists within the retail businesses, where the portfolio comprises homogeneous assets and where statistical techniques are appropriate, to raise specific provisions on a portfolio basis.
General provisions are raised to cover losses which are judged to be present in loans and advances at the balance sheet date, but which have not been specifically identified as such. These provisions are adjusted at least half yearly by an appropriate charge or release of general provision based on a statistical analysis. The accuracy of this analysis is periodically assessed against actual losses. Gradings are used to rate the credit quality of borrowers. Each grade corresponds to an Expected Default Frequency and is calculated by using manual or computer driven score-sheets validated by an analysis of the Groups own historical data. This grade can be derived from different sources depending upon the borrower (e.g. internal model, credit rating agency). The general provision also takes into account the economic climate in the market in which the Group operates and the level of security held in relation to each category of counterparty. The general provision includes a specifically identified element to cover country transfer risk calculated on a basis consistent with the overall general provision calculation. General provisions are created with respect to the recoverability of assets arising from off balance sheet exposures in a manner consistent with the general provisioning methodology.
The aggregate specific and general provisions which are made during the year, less amounts released and recoveries of bad debts previously written off, are charged against operating profit and are deducted from loans and advances. Impaired lendings are written off against the balance sheet asset and provision in part, or in whole, when the extent of the loss incurred has been confirmed.
If the collection of interest is doubtful, it is credited to a suspense account and excluded from interest income in the profit and loss account. Although it continues to be charged to the customers accounts, the suspense account in the balance sheet is netted against the relevant loan. If the collection of interest is considered to be remote, interest is no longer applied and suspended interest is written off. Loans on which interest is suspended are not reclassified as accruing interest until interest and principal payments are up to date and future payments are reasonably assured.
Assets acquired in exchange for advances in order to achieve an orderly realisation continue to be reported as advances. The asset acquired is recorded at the carrying value of the original advance updated as at the date of the exchange. Any subsequent impairment is accounted for as a specific provision.
(m) Debt securities and equity sharesInvestment securities are debt securities and equity shares intended for use on a continuing basis by the Group and identified as such. Investment securities are stated at cost less any provision for impairment. The cost of dated investment securities is adjusted for the amortisation of premiums or discounts on purchase over the period to redemption. The amortisation of premiums and discounts is included in interest receivable.
Other debt securities and equity shares are stated at market value and profits and losses arising from this revaluation are taken directly to the profit and loss account through dealing profits. Listed securities are valued based on market prices, with long positions at bid and short
positions at offer price. Unlisted securities are valued based on the Directors estimate, which takes into consideration discounted cash flows, price earnings ratios and other valuation techniques.
In the case of private equity investments, listed and unlisted investments are stated at cost less any provision for impairment.
Investment and other securities may be lent or sold subject to a commitment to repurchase them. Securities lent or sold are retained on the balance sheet where substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership remain with the Group. Similarly, securities purchased subject to a commitment to resell are treated as collateralised lending transactions where the Group does not acquire the risks and rewards of ownership.
(n) Pensions and other post-retirement benefitsThe Group provides pension plans for employees in most parts of the world. Arrangements for staff retirement benefits in overseas locations vary from country to country and are made in accordance with local regulations and customs. For defined contribution schemes, the pension cost recognised in the profit and loss account represents the contributions payable to the scheme. The majority of UK staff are members of The Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund (the UK Fund) which comprises four sections. These are a defined benefit scheme (the 1964 Pension Scheme) and a defined contribution scheme (the Retirement Investment Scheme), which are both now closed to new members, a hybrid scheme, afterwork, and a defined contribution scheme, the Pension Investment Plan. Details are set out in Note 4. Other UK staff are covered by broadly comparable schemes which are accounted for on a comparable basis. The assets of the UK Fund are held separately from the assets of the Group and are administered by a trustee. The pension cost is assessed in accordance with the advice of a qualified actuary, using the projected unit method. Variations from the regular cost are allocated over the expected average service lives of current employees. Provisions for pensions arise when the profit and loss account charge exceeds the contribution to the scheme as a result of actuarial valuations. These provisions will be eliminated over the estimated service lives of the employees. The basis of estimation is set out in Note 4 on page 115. The Group also provides post-retirement health care to certain staff and pensioners in the UK and US. Where appropriate, provisions for post-retirement benefits are raised on a basis similar to that detailed for defined benefit pension schemes. Where an actuarial basis is not appropriate, provisions are recognised in accordance with the policy on non-credit risk provisions (see (q) below).
(o) Finance leasesAssets leased to customers under agreements which transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, other than legal title, are classified as finance leases. Finance lease receivables are included in loans and advances to customers. Gross earnings under finance leases are allocated to accounting periods in such a way as to give a constant periodic rate of return on the net cash investment. Finance lease receivables are stated at the cost of the equipment, including gross earnings to date, less rentals received to date.
(p) Deferred taxDeferred tax is provided in full in respect of timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date. Timing differences are differences between the Groups taxable profits and its results as stated in the accounts that arise from the inclusion of gains and losses in tax assessments in periods different from those in which they are recognised in the financial statements. Deferred tax is not provided on permanent differences. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is regarded as more likely than not that they will be recoverable.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 103
Deferred tax is not provided on the unremitted earnings of subsidiary undertakings, joint ventures and associated undertakings except to the extent that dividends have been accrued or a binding agreement to distribute past earnings in the future has been entered into.
Deferred tax is measured at the average tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the timing differences are expected to reverse, based on tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantially enacted by the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is not discounted.
(q) Non-credit risk provisionsProvisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is probable that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation and it can be reliably estimated.
When a leasehold property ceases to be used in the business, provision is made where the unavoidable costs of the future obligations relating to the lease are expected to exceed anticipated income. The provision is discounted using market rates to reflect the long-term nature of the cash flows.
When the Group has a detailed formal plan for restructuring a business and has raised valid expectations in those affected by the restructuring by starting to implement the plan or announcing its main features, provision is made for the anticipated cost of the restructuring, including redundancy costs. The provision raised is normally utilised within 12 months.
Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain future events or present obligations where the transfer of economic benefit is uncertain or cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised but are disclosed unless they are remote.
(r) DerivativesDerivatives are used to hedge interest, exchange rate commodity and equity exposures related to non-trading positions. Instruments used for hedging purposes include swaps, equity derivatives, forward rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these instruments. In addition, the use of derivatives and their sale to customers as risk management products is an integral part of the Groups trading activities. Derivatives entered into for trading purposes include swaps, equity derivatives, credit derivatives, commodity derivatives, forward rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these instruments.
Derivatives used for asset and liability management purposes
The criteria required for a derivative instrument to be classified as a designated hedge are that:
(i) the transaction must be reasonably expected to match or eliminate a significant proportion of the risk inherent in the assets, liabilities, other positions or cash flows being hedged and which results from potential movements in market rates and credit risk; and
(ii) adequate evidence of the intention to hedge and linkage with the underlying risk inherent in the assets, liabilities, other positions or cash flows being hedged, must be established at the outset of the transaction.
Designated hedges are reviewed for effectiveness by regular tests to determine that the hedge is closely negatively correlated to the designated hedged position in each and every identified time band in the maturity profile.
Profits and losses on interest rate swaps and options entered into for hedging purposes are measured on an accrual accounting basis, included in the related category of income and expense and reported as part of the yield on the hedged transaction. Amounts paid or received over the life of futures contracts are deferred until the contract is closed; accumulated deferred amounts on futures contracts and settlement amounts paid or received on forward contracts are accounted for as elements of the carrying value of the associated instrument, affecting the resulting yield.
A premium paid or received in respect of a credit derivative hedging an asset or liability is amortised over the life of the protection purchased or sold against either interest payable or interest receivable. Where a credit event occurs which triggers a recovery under the credit derivative, then the recovery will be offset against the profit and loss charge on the underlying asset or liability.
Foreign exchange contracts which qualify as hedges of foreign currency exposures, including positions relating to investments the Group makes outside the UK, are retranslated at the closing rate with any forward premium or discount recognised over the life of the contract in net interest income.
Profits and losses related to qualifying hedges, including foreign exchange contracts, of firm commitments and probable anticipated transactions are deferred and recognised in income or as adjustments to carrying amounts when the hedged transactions occur.
Hedging transactions that are superseded or cease to be effective are measured at fair value. Any profit or loss on these transactions, together with any profit or loss arising on hedging transactions that are terminated prior to the end of the life of the asset, are deferred and amortised into interest income or expense over the remaining life of the item previously being hedged.
When the underlying asset, liability position or cash flow is terminated prior to the hedging transaction, or an anticipated transaction is no longer likely to occur, the hedging transaction is measured on the fair value accounting basis, as described in the section on derivatives used for trading purposes below, prior to being transferred to the trading portfolio. The profit or loss arising from the fair value measurement prior to the transfer to the trading portfolio is included in the category of income or expense relating to the previously hedged transaction.
Derivatives used for trading purposes
The fair value of derivatives is determined by calculating the expected cash flows under the terms of each specific contract, discounted back to a present value. The expected cash flows for each contract are
104
determined either directly by reference to actual cash flows implicit in observable market prices or through modelling cash flows using appropriate financial-markets pricing models. The effect of discounting expected cash flows back to present value is achieved by constructing discount curves derived from the market price of the most appropriate observable interest rate products such as deposits, interest rate futures and swaps. In addition, the Group maintains fair value adjustments reflecting the cost of credit risk (where this is not embedded in the fair value), hedging costs not captured in pricing models, future administration costs associated with ongoing operational support of products as well as adjustments to reflect the cost of exiting illiquid or other significant positions.
(s) Collateral and nettingThe Group enters into master agreements with counterparties whenever possible and, when appropriate, obtains collateral. Master agreements provide that, if an event of default occurs, all outstanding transactions with the counterparty will fall due and all amounts outstanding will be settled on a net basis.
Where the amounts owed by both the Group and the counterparty are determinable and in freely convertible currencies, and where the Group has the ability to insist on net settlement which is assured beyond doubt, and is based on a legal right under the netting agreement that would survive the insolvency of the counterparty, transactions with positive fair values are netted against transactions with negative fair values.
The Group obtains collateral in respect of customer liabilities where this is considered appropriate. The collateral normally takes the form of a lien over the customers assets and gives the Group a claim on these assets for both existing and future liabilities.
The Group also receives collateral in the form of cash or securities in respect of other credit instruments, such as stock borrowing contracts, and derivative contracts in order to reduce credit risk. Collateral received in the form of securities is not recorded on the balance sheet. Collateral received in the form of cash is recorded on the balance sheet with a corresponding liability or asset. These items are assigned to deposits received from bank or other counterparties in the case of cash collateral received, and to loans and advances to banks or customers in the case of cash collateral paid away. Any interest payable or receivable arising is recorded as interest payable or interest income respectively.
(t) Credit related instrumentsThe Group treats credit related instruments (other than credit derivatives) as contingent liabilities and these are not shown on the balance sheet unless, and until, the Group is called upon to make a payment under the instrument. Assets arising from payments to a third party where the Group is awaiting reimbursement from the customer, are shown on the balance sheet where reimbursement is considered to be virtually certain. Fees received for providing these instruments are taken to profit over the life of the instrument and reflected in fees and commissions receivable.
(u) Sale and repurchase agreements (including stock borrowing and lending)The Group enters into sale and repurchase agreements, including stock lending arrangements (repos), and purchase and resale agreements, including stock borrowing arrangements (reverse repos). Under a repo (sale and repurchase agreement) an asset is sold (or lent) to a counterparty with a commitment to repurchase (or return) the assets at a future date at an agreed price. A reverse repo is the same transaction from the opposite viewpoint. The cash legs of these transactions are included within loans and advances to banks, loans and advances to
customers, deposits by banks and customer accounts. The Group aims to earn net interest income and dealing profits from these activities, as well as funding its own holdings of securities. The difference between sale and repurchase and purchase and resale prices for such transactions, including dividends received where appropriate, is charged or credited to the profit and loss account over the life of the relevant transactions.
(v) Securitisation transactionsCertain Group undertakings have issued debt securities or have entered into funding arrangements with lenders in order to finance specific loans and advances to customers. In accordance with FRS 5, these balances are either accounted for on the basis of linked presentation or through separate recognition of the gross assets and related funding.
(w) Capital instrumentsDebt securities in issue and similar securities are stated at the net issue proceeds adjusted for amortisation of premiums, discounts and expenses related to their issue where the liability is a fixed amount. Where the liability fluctuates, based on, for example, the performance of an index then the debt security reflects the current value of the liability.
Loan capital in issue is stated at the net issue proceeds adjusted for amortisation of premiums, discounts and expenses related to their issue. Amortisation is calculated in order to achieve a constant yield across the life of the instrument.
(x) Internally developed softwareThe Groups general policy is to write-off such expenditure as incurred except where the software is required to facilitate the use of new hardware. Capitalised amounts are recorded as tangible fixed assets.
Changes in accounting policyFollowing the issue of UITF Abstract 37, Purchases and sales of own shares, Group holdings of Barclays PLC shares (excluding shares held in Employee Share Ownership Plan (ESOP) trusts) are accounted for as a deduction in arriving at shareholders funds, rather than as assets. Purchases and sales of Barclays PLC shares are shown as changes in shareholders funds. No profits or losses are recognised in respect of dealings in Barclays PLC. Comparatives have been restated accordingly. As a result, equity shares and shareholders funds have been reduced by £4m at 31st December 2002, and £12m at 31st December 2003. There was no impact on the 2002 or 2003 profit and loss account.
There have been no other significant changes to the accounting policies as described in the 2002 Annual Report.
Future UK accounting developmentsThe Group is currently considering the implications of UITF Abstract 38, Accounting for ESOP trusts, which was issued in December 2003. UITF Abstract 38 requires shares held in ESOP trusts to be accounted for as a deduction in arriving at shareholders funds, rather than as assets. The charge to the profit and loss account in respect of such shares is based on the intrinsic value of the shares, rather than book value. UITF Abstract 38 will be implemented by the Group in 2004.
Conversion to International Financial Reporting Standards in 2005By Regulation, the EU has agreed that virtually all listed companies must use International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) adopted for use in the EU in the preparation of their 2005 consolidated accounts. Barclays will have to comply with this Regulation. The objective is to improve financial reporting and enhance transparency to assist the free flow of capital throughout the EU and to improve the efficiency of the capital markets.
Although existing UK requirements are similar in many ways to IFRSs, there are key differences. The final text for many of the standards was
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 105
finalised late in 2003, with one key standard, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement (IAS 39), expected to be substantially completed by the end of March 2004. This standard and Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation (IAS 32) are expected to have significant impact on the reported results. Other standards, particularly Employee Benefits (IAS 19) and proposals for accounting for share based payments and goodwill are also expected to have significant impact.
The Group commenced a programme of work in 2002, initially identifying the differences between IFRS and existing UK standards based on the requirements then in force. This led to a programme of work led centrally, but involving all the business units and functions, to change systems and processes and to provide training so as to ensure that the Group can meet the requirements fully in 2005. In addition, the programme is assisting the business units and functions to consider the wider business impact of the change in reporting in the EU. This work is advancing to plan. The main risks and uncertainties relate to the standards that have not yet been finalised and adopted by the EU. However, the programme is following normal project controls and change management and we are confident that we will be able to meet requirements for financial reporting in 2005.
US GAAPSignificant differences exist between accounting principles generally accepted in the UK and those generally accepted in the US. The effect of US GAAP on attributable profit and shareholders funds of Barclays PLC is set out in Note 61.
Accounting Presentation
The prior period presentation has, where appropriate, been restated to conform with current year classification.
Nature of businessBarclays is an international financial services group engaged primarily in banking, investment banking and asset management. In terms of assets employed, Barclays is one of the largest financial services groups in the UK. The Group also operates in many other countries around the world and is a leading provider of co-ordinated global services to multinational corporations and financial institutions in the worlds main financial centres.
Analyses by geographical segments and classes of businessThe analyses by geographical segment are generally based on the location of the office recording the transaction.
AcquisitionsIn 2001, the Group increased its shareholding in Banco Barclays SA (formerly Banco Barclays e Galicia SA) from 50% to over 99%. The entity has been consolidated as a subsidiary undertaking since 1st January 2001.
In April 2002, Barclaycard acquired the UK Providian credit card business.
In October 2002, Barclays and Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce completed the combination of their retail, corporate and offshore banking operations in the Caribbean to create FirstCaribbean International Bank (FirstCaribbean). Barclays interest in the new entity has been accounted for as an Associated undertaking. The transaction resulted in a gain for Barclays of £206m (recognised in the Statement of total recognised gains and losses) consequent on the disposal of a share of its Caribbean operations. The acquisition of a share of CIBC West Indies Holding Limited has generated goodwill in Barclays of £131m.
On 31st January 2003, Barclays acquired the retail stockbroking business Charles Schwab Europe.
On 19th May 2003, Barclays completed the acquisition of Clydesdale Financial Services Limited and its holding company Carnegie Holdings Limited, a retailer point of sale finance business.
On 16th July 2003, Barclays completed the acquisition of Banco Zaragozano, a Spanish private sector banking group.
On 17th December 2003, Barclays acquired Gerrard Management Services Limited (Gerrard), a private client discretionary and advisory asset management business.
DisposalsIn 2001, the Group disposed of the Greek Branches of the Bank and Banque Woolwich SA.
In 2002 the Group disposed of a share of the Groups Caribbean operation (see detail under Acquisitions above). The effect of the disposal is reflected in the Statement of recognised gains and losses on page 108.
In 2003, the Group did not make any significant disposals.
106
Consolidated Accounts Barclays PLCConsolidated Profit and Loss Account
Consolidated profit and loss accountFor the year ended 31st December 2003
All results arise from continuing operations. For each of the years reported above, there was no material difference between profit before tax and profit retained and profit on an historical cost basis.
The Board of Directors approved the accounts set out on pages 101 to 190 on 11th February 2004.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 107
Consolidated Accounts Barclays PLCStatement of Total Recognised Gains and Losses
Statement of total recognised gains and lossesFor the year ended 31st December 2003
108
Consolidated Accounts Barclays PLCConsolidated Balance Sheet
Consolidated balance sheetAs at 31st December 2003
Sir Peter Middleton GCB Chairman
Matthew Barrett Group Chief Executive
Naguib Kheraj Group Finance Director
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 109
110
Consolidated Accounts Barclays PLCConsolidated Statement of Changes in Reserves
Consolidated statement of changes in reservesFor the year ended 31st December 2003
The Group operates in a number of countries subject to regulations under which a local subsidiary undertaking has to maintain a minimum level of capital. The current policy of the Group is that local capital requirements are met, as far as possible, by the retention of profit. Certain countries operate exchange control regulations which limit the amount of dividends that can be remitted to non-resident shareholders. It is not possible to determine the amount of profit retained and other reserves that is restricted by these regulations, but the net profit retained of overseas subsidiaries, associated undertakings and joint ventures at 31st December 2003 totalled £925m (2002: £1,038m, 2001: £1,190m). If such overseas reserves were to be remitted, other tax liabilities, which have not been provided for in the accounts, might arise.
Goodwill amounting to £205m (2002: £205m, 2001: £215m) has been charged directly against reserves in prior years in respect of acquisitions. This amount is net of any goodwill attributable to subsidiary undertakings disposed of prior to the balance sheet date.
In 1998, the Group established a Qualifying Employee Share Ownership Trust (QUEST) for the purposes of delivering shares on the exercise of options under the SAYE. During 2003 the Group received from the trustees of the QUEST £88m (2002: £122m, 2001: £195m) on the issue of shares in respect of the exercise of options awarded under SAYE. Of the amount received from the trustees, employees paid £53m (2002: £76m, 2001: £90m) and the balance of £35m (2002: £46m, 2001: £105m) comprised utilisation of contribution to the QUEST from Group Companies together with net interest earned thereon. During 2003 the Barclays Group (PSP & ESOS) Employee Share Ownership Trust (ESOT) ceased to be used to facilitate the provision of Barclays PLC shares to participants exercising rollover options under the Woolwich plc 1998 Executive Share Option Plan (WESOP). During 2003, the Group received from the trustees of this trust £nil (2002: £8m and 2001: £6m) on the issue of shares in respect of the exercise of options awarded under WESOP. Of the amount received from the trustees, employees paid £nil (2002: £6m and 2001: £4m) and the balance of £nil (2002: £2m and 2001: £2m) comprised contribution to the trust from Group Companies. WESOP exercises during 2003 were satisfied by issuing shares directly to participants.
Accumulated exchange rate translation differences included in reserves are £568m debit (2002: £539m, 2001: £478m both debit).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 111
Consolidated Accounts Barclays PLCConsolidated Cash Flow Statement
Consolidated cash flow statementFor the year ended 31st December 2003
112
Consolidated Accounts Barclays PLCParent Company Accounts
Parent company accounts
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 113
Notes to the AccountsFor the Year Ended 31st December 2003
1 Dealing profits
Dealing profits include the profits and losses arising both on the purchase and sale of trading instruments and from their revaluation to market value, together with the interest income earned from these instruments and the related funding cost.
Of the total dealing profit, £498m was earned on securities (2002: £325m, 2001: £345m).
Rates related businesses include fixed income, foreign exchange, commodities, emerging markets, money markets trading and equity related activities. Credit related businesses include trading relating to loans, corporate bonds, credit derivatives and structured capital markets.
2 Other operating income
3 Administrative expenses staff costs
The following amounts, relating to the administration staff (including temporary staff) whose remuneration is reflected in the valuation of the long-term assurance fund, are not included in staff costs reported above:
Average number of employees
114
4 Pensions, post-retirement benefits and other staff costs
Pensions
The 1964 Pension Scheme
The Retirement Investment Scheme (RIS)
The Pension Investment Plan (PIP)
afterwork
In addition, the costs of ill-health retirements and death in service benefits are generally borne by the UKRF for each of the four sections.
Integration of the Woolwich Pension Fund (WPF)
Formal actuarial valuations of the UKRF are carried out triennially by a professional qualified independent actuary. The most recent formal valuation was conducted as at 30th September 2001 and expresses the assets and liabilities at market values. However, in light of the changing market conditions, an interim actuarial review was conducted as at 30th September 2003. The market value of assets at the interim review date was £10,950m and the valuation revealed a surplus of assets over the accrued liabilities of £158m or 1% after allowing for expected future salary increases. Whilst this surplus was estimated to be sufficient to allow the Bank to continue its contribution holiday, which commenced in January 1998, for all sections until 2004, it was expected that at this point Bank contributions would recommence at the full rate. The Bank decided to accelerate these future contributions through a payment of £500m which was paid in December 2003. As a consequence, further contributions are not expected to be required until at least the start of 2006. The next formal valuation will be conducted as at 30th September 2004, at which point the position will again be reviewed. Protected Rights contributions in respect of RIS and PIP members have been paid as required by the contracting-out regulations. The principal financial assumptions underlying the 2003 interim actuarial review were:
The projected unit method was used for the 2003 interim actuarial review. In calculating the surplus of assets over accrued liabilities, assets were taken at their market value and a discount rate of 6.4% p.a. at 30th September 2003 was used to value the 1964 Pension Scheme accrued liabilities. This rate of 6.4% was derived by taking a weighted average of the market yields on the day, weighting by reference to the UKRFs strategic asset allocation; for the equity component, allowance was made for future dividend growth.
It is the Banks policy to allow for the results of a new valuation in its pension charge in the year following the valuation date. Therefore, the 2003 figures shown below reflect the 2002 interim actuarial valuation, with the pensions charge in the accounts being reduced over the remaining service lives of the members to take account of the surplus.
Without the benefit of the surplus, the 1964 Pension Scheme charge, based on the 2002 interim valuation, would be 21.1% of the pensionable salaries (on the projected unit method) assessed using the assumption regarding return on new investments, while contributions to the RIS and PIP would equal the contributions described above plus the costs of ill-health and death in service benefits.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 115
4 Pensions, post-retirement benefits and other staff costs (continued)
Of the total regular cost in 2003 of £221m, £165m relates to the 1964 Pension Scheme, £37m to the RIS and £19m to the PIP. The regular cost in respect ofafterwork, which during 2003 only included new employees from 1st October 2003, was less than £1m.
The approach taken to calculating the pension charge in the accounts for the 1964 Pension Scheme is to take assets and liabilities at market values with effect from 1st January 2003. The assumptions used to derive the 1964 Pension Scheme pensions charge differ from those shown above in that returns on new investments are assumed to be 6.5% p.a., dividend growth is assumed to be 4.3% p.a and future price inflation is assumed to be 2.3% p.a. A discount rate at 1st January 2003 of 6.8% was used to value the accrued liabilities, derived as explained above, but based on market conditions at 31st December 2002. This resulted in an accounting surplus of assets over the accrued liabilities and pension prepayments of £544m or 6%, allowing for expected future salary increases. Spreading the accounting surplus using the straight-line method over the future remaining service lives of the active members would be sufficient to produce a variation from regular cost of £90m including interest.
Total pension costs of the Group are summarised as follows:
The increase in the pension cost is primarily due to a decrease in the accounting surplus which has resulted in a corresponding decrease in the variation from regular cost. The Bank also operates a defined benefit scheme for overseas employees of the Bank similar in design to the 1964 Pension Scheme, the Barclays Bank (1951) Pension Fund, which had a formal valuation as at 30th September 2002 and an interim valuation as at 30th September 2003. The pension charge has been assessed using consistent assumptions to those used for the 1964 Pension Scheme and a credit of £3m (2002: £3m, 2001: £3m) is included in Other UK pension schemes.
A net prepayment of £637m was reflected in the balance sheet (2002: £137m), which results from the difference between the amounts recognised as costs in the profit and loss account and the amounts funded.
Note 60 contains the disclosures required by FRS 17, Note 61 provides additional disclosures required by US Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No. 132 (revised).
Post-retirement benefits
Other staff costs
116
5 Administrative expenses other
Fees paid to the Groups main auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP and its worldwide associates, were as follows:
The figures shown in the above table include amounts paid in the United Kingdom to PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP and also PricewaterhouseCoopers in previous years. Fees for audit services above include all amounts paid to the Groups auditors in their capacity as such.
In addition to the fees included in the above table, amounts paid in prior periods to PwC Consulting, the management consultancy arm of PricewaterhouseCoopers up to its sale to the IBM Corporation on 1st October 2002, amounted to £nil in the year (2002: £6m, 2001: £12m).
Further assurance services include internal control reviews, attest services not required by statute or regulation and consultation concerning financial accounting and reporting standards.
Taxation services include compliance services such as tax return preparation and advisory services such as consultation on tax matters, tax advice relating to transactions and other tax planning and advice.
Transaction support services includes due diligence related to transactions and accounting consultations and audits in connection with transactions.
Other services primarily include general process reviews and training programmes.
6 Depreciation and amortisation
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 117
7 Provisions for contingent liabilities and commitments
8 Profit/(loss) on disposal/termination of Group undertakings
The net profit on disposal of Group undertakings comprises profits on disposal of £7m (2002: £14m, 2001: £15m) and losses on disposal of £3m (2002: £6m, 2001: £19m).
Goodwill previously written off to reserves on disposals amounted to £nil (2002: £10m, 2001: £nil). No tax credit is attributable to the losses on disposal in 2003, 2002 and 2001 and no tax was payable on the 2003, 2002 and 2001 gains.
Up to the date of sale, the businesses sold in 2003 contributed £29m profit to Group profit before tax (2002: £3m profit, 2001: £8m loss).
9 Tax
The charge for tax is based upon the effective UK corporation tax rate of 30% (2002: 30%, 2001: 30%) and comprises:
Current tax includes a credit of £53m (2002: £38m credit, 2001: £11m charge) on the shareholders interest in the long-term assurance fund. Included within current tax are prior year adjustments to UK tax of (£3m) (2002: (£12m), 2001: 26m) and overseas tax of £10m (2002: £3m, 2001: £2m).
Available overseas tax credits of £197m (2002: £221m, 2001: £232m) have been applied to reduce UK tax in accordance with UK legislation.
118
9 Tax (continued)
The tax for the year is lower (2002 and 2001: lower) than the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK (30%) (2002 and 2001: 30%). The differences are set out below:
The charge for the year is based upon a UK corporation tax rate of 30% for the calendar year 2003 (2002: 30%, 2001: 30%). The effective rate of tax was 28.0% (2002: 29.8%, 2001: 27.5%). The decrease in the tax rate was primarily due to the beneficial effects of lower tax on overseas income, recognition of agreed capital gains tax losses and certain non-taxable gains, partially offset by the absence of tax relief on goodwill. The beneficial effect of the Enterprise Zone Allowance in the current tax charge is offset by a corresponding increase in the deferred tax charge.
10 Minority and other interests Barclays PLC
Equity minority interests in the balance sheet represent the interests of third parties in the equity shares of the Group subsidiary undertakings.
11 Dividends Barclays PLC
Dividends amounting to £0.2m (2002: £0.2m, 2001: £0.2m) are payable on the staff shares, which carry a fixed dividend of 20% per annum unless no dividend is paid for the year on the ordinary shares.
12 Earnings per 25p ordinary share Barclays PLC
Basic and diluted earnings are based upon the results after deducting tax, profit attributable to minority interests and dividends on staff shares.
Certain shares held by incentive plans have been excluded from the calculation of earnings per share in line with UITF 13, on the grounds that the trustee has waived all dividend and voting rights.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 119
13 Treasury bills and other eligible bills
Treasury bills and other eligible bills are mainly short term in maturity with a book value not materially different from market value.
The total amount of treasury bills and other eligible bills included above, which are subject to sale and repurchase agreements, was £nil at 31st December 2003 (2002: £10m).
14 Loans and advances to banks
At 31st December 2003, there were loans and advances to banks of £27m (2002: £9m) due from associated undertakings and joint ventures.
The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities and these amounted to £346m at 31st December 2003 (2002: £565m).
Additional analyses are provided within the loans and advances, provisions for bad and doubtful debts and potential credit risk lendings sections on pages 31 to 47.
The geographic analysis of the banking business is based on the location of the office from which the lendings are made. The trading business, which is largely carried out in the UK, the US and Japan, is more international in nature and has not been analysed geographically. It primarily constitutes settlement and reverse repo balances.
Provisions include specific provisions of £12m (2002: £77m) and general provisions of £4m (2002: £5m).
120
15 Loans and advances to customers
At 31st December 2003, there were loans and advances to customers of £277m (2002: £249m) due from associated undertakings and joint ventures.
Mortgage incentive costs of £81m (2002: £86m, 2001: £115m) have been charged to net interest income.
The geographical analysis of the banking business is based on the location of the office from which the lendings are made. The trading business, which is largely carried out in the UK, the US and Japan, is more international in nature and has not been analysed geographically. It primarily constitutes settlement and reverse repo balances.
Provisions include specific provisions of £2,221m (2002: £2,184m) and general provisions of £791m (2002: £732m).
Banking business loans and advances to customers include finance lease receivables of £5,877m (2002: £4,389m) which are stated in the balance sheet after deducting £1,737m (2002: £2,993m) of unearned charges and interest. Assets acquired in the year for letting under finance leases amounted to £645m (2002: £401m).
The following unguaranteed residual values are included in finance lease receivables:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 121
15 Loans and advances to customers (continued)
Securitised transactions
Linked presentation
The securitisation company involved is Millshaw SAMS (No. 1) Limited. All the shares in Millshaw SAMS (No. 1) Limited are held beneficially by Millshaw SAMS Holdings Limited. All the shares in Millshaw SAMS Holdings Limited are held by Royal Exchange Trust Company Limited. The Group does not own, directly or indirectly, any of the share capital of Millshaw SAMS (No. 1) Limited or its parent companies. The Bank has made an interest bearing subordinated loan to Millshaw SAMS (No. 1) Limited repayable on final redemption of the floating rate notes.
The Bank received payments from the securitisation companies in respect of fees for loan administration services, and also under the terms of the subordinated loan agreement. The Bank has no right to repurchase the benefit of any of the securitised loans and no obligation to do so, other than in certain circumstances where the Bank is in breach of warranty. The personal mortgage loans subject to non-recourse finance are as follows:
Linked presentation has been applied for these loans and the net of the loans and finance is included within loans and advances to customers on the balance sheet. The amounts involved in the linked presentation have not been shown on the face of the balance sheet because they are not deemed to be significant.
Gross assets presentation
During 2003, a portion of the residential mortgage portfolio of Barclays Bank S.A. in Spain was also securitised. The sterling equivalent at 31st December 2003 of the mortgages securitised was £1,085m. The total portfolio is included within gross loans and advances and in Note 58, and the funding giving rise to the noteholders interest is included within Debt securities in issue.
122
16 Provisions for bad and doubtful debts
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 123
17 Debt securities
The total value of debt securities at 31st December 2003 includes securities which are subject to sale and repurchase agreements of £10,259m (2002: £5,839m) unamortised net premium on investment securities of £153m (2002: £590m) and holdings by the Group of debt securities of £4m (2002: £1m) issued by associated undertakings or joint ventures. The value of securities due within one year at 31st December 2003 was £20,458m (2002: £22,281m).
During 1999, the Group securitised a portfolio of investment debt securities. Linked presentation under FRS 5 is not available and therefore the portfolio with a sterling equivalent book value of £192m at 31st December 2003 (2002: £318m) is included within the total above. The funding from this transaction is reported in Other liabilities (Note 29 on page 131).
The Group has a portfolio of investment debt securities, a large portion of which are subject to limited recourse financing. Linked presentation under FRS 5 is not available and therefore the portfolio with a sterling equivalent book value of £3,750m (2002: £457m) is included in the total above, with the financing reported in Deposits by banks and Debt securities in issue. At 31st December 2003, the Groups net exposure to these investment debt securities, after taking into account the limited recourse financing, was £1,203m (2002: £97m).
Barclays PLC holds, as an investment, British government stock with a book value of £0.1m (2002: £0.1m).
Gross gains of £4m (2002: £5m, 2001: £37m) and gross losses of £6m (2002: £37m, 2001: £13m) were realised on the sale of investment securities using an average weighted cost approach.
Other debt securities are held at valuation. The cost of Other debt securities is not available and would be unreasonably expensive to obtain.
Of the total debt securities disclosed above, £63,629m (2002: £56,290m) were listed on a recognised exchange. These listed debt securities had a market value of £64,230m (2002: £56,991m).
See page 91 of the Financial Review for the valuation and maturity analysis of investment securities.
124
18 Equity shares
Gross unrealised gains on equity shares amounted to £180m (2002: £14m). Gross unrealised losses amounted to £nil (2002: £10m).
Gross gains of £82m (2002: £91m, 2001: £68m) and gross losses of £nil (2002: £12m, 2001: £8m) were realised on the sale of Investment securities.
The cost of Other securities is not available and would be unreasonably expensive to obtain.
The 2002 comparatives have been restated to reflect the impact of UITF Abstract 37 see summary of changes in accounting policy on page 105.
Of the total equity shares disclosed above, £6,471m (2002: £2,273m) were listed on a recognised exchange. These listed equity securities had a market value of £6,486m (2002: £2,277m).
19 Interests in associated undertakings and joint ventures
Associated undertakings and joint ventures include £332m in respect of banks (2002: £357m). Dividend income from associated undertakings and joint ventures amount to £7m (2002: £1m). On an historical cost basis, the Groups interests in associated undertakings and joint ventures at 31st December 2003 amount to £428m (2002: £455m). Of the above interests in associated undertakings and joint ventures, FirstCaribbean International Bank and Gabetti Holding SpA are listed on recognised exchanges. FirstCaribbean International Bank is listed on the Barbados, Trinidad and Tobago and Jamaican Stock Exchanges and Gabetti Holding SpA is listed on the Milan exchange.
The Groups share of the total operating income of joint ventures is £21m (2002: £17m, 2001: £44m). The Groups share of the total operating income of FirstCaribbean International Bank is £93m (2002: £31m).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 125
19 Interests in associated undertakings and joint ventures (continued)
Included within Barclays share of associates assets is goodwill as follows:
The table below provides summarised financial information of associated undertakings and joint ventures in which the Group has an interest (the entities entire financial position and results of operations are presented, not Barclays share).
The amounts included above are based on accounts made up to 31st December 2003 with the exception of FirstCaribbean International Bank and certain undertakings included within the other associates category for which the amounts are based on accounts made up to dates not earlier than three months before the balance sheet date.
20 Intangible fixed assets
Goodwill is amortised to the profit and loss account over its useful economic life, generally estimated to be between 5 and 20 years.
126
21 Tangible fixed assets
The net book value of property occupied by the Group for its own use was £1,250m at 31st December 2003 (2002: £1,116m).
The net book value of property at 31st December 2003 included £191m (2002: £194m) in respect of land.
As at 31st December 2003, Barclays Group owns leases or holds under licence properties throughout the world arising from operational activities.
The majority of UK properties are retail branches and are widely distributed throughout England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland. The most significant properties are 54 Lombard Street, St Swithins House, Murray House and North and South Colonnade, Canary Wharf, all located in London, together with administrative buildings in Northampton, Knutsford, Coventry and Poole.
On 3rd July 2002, Barclays Group disposed of its freehold Head office at 54 Lombard Street. Barclays continues to occupy a substantial part of these premises under a lease with the facility to terminate the lease when the Head office moves to new premises currently under construction in Canary Wharf, London.
22 Commitments for capital expenditure not provided in these accounts
At 31st December 2003, commitments for capital expenditure under contract amounted to £nil (2002: £1m).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 127
23 Other assets
Own shares represent the cost of shares held by employee benefit trusts, to the extent that the cost has not yet been expensed to the profit and loss account.
The total number of shares held in employee benefit trusts at 31st December 2003, including those represented by the balance sheet value, was 82.8m (2002: 72.5m). Dividend rights had been waived on 1.6m (2002: 3.7m) of these shares. The market value of the shares based on the year-end share price of £4.98 (2002: £3.85) was £412m (2002: £279m). As at 31st December 2003, 7.3m (2002: 4.3m) of the total shares held in the trusts were exercisable under options granted.
24 Retail long-term assurance funds
The increase/(decrease) in the shareholders interest in the retail long-term assurance funds in the UK is calculated as follows:
During the year non-recourse floating rate notes were issued. The first £400m of emerging surplus from the retail long-term assurance funds is used to repay these notes with the remaining surplus being available to shareholders.
In addition to the increase (2002 a decrease) in the shareholders interest in the retail long-term assurance funds detailed above, £9m (2002: £4m) of other income from the long-term assurance business has been recognised in the year.
The principal economic assumptions used in calculating the value of the shareholders interest were as follows:
The retail life-fund assets attributable to policyholders comprise:
128
25 Prepayments and accrued income
26 Deposits by banks
At 31st December 2003, there were deposits by banks of £1,438m (2002: £717m) due to associated undertakings and joint ventures.
Deposits by banks are mostly over £50,000.
A further analysis of deposits by banks is given within the Deposits section on page 90 of the Financial Review.
27 Customer accounts
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 129
27 Customer accounts (continued)
At 31st December 2003, there were customer accounts of £34m (2002: £189m) due to associated undertakings and joint ventures.
Deposits in offices in the UK received from non-residents amounted to £27,593m (2002: £19,490m).
Other time deposits in the UK and the US are mostly over £50,000.
A further analysis of customer accounts is provided within the Deposits section on page 90 of the Financial Review.
28 Debt securities in issue
Debt securities in issue at 31st December 2003 included certificates of deposit of £28,536m (2002: £30,045m) and commercial paper of £4,426m (2002: £5,192m). At 31st December 2003, there were £448m of debt securities in issue due to associated undertakings and joint ventures (2002: £nil).
Debt securities in issue at 31st December 2003 include £2,508m (2002: £644m) raised from the securitisation of credit and charge card receivables (see Note 15).
130
29 Other liabilities
Of the total short positions disclosed above, £37,028m (2002: £24,339m) were listed on a recognised exchange.
Other liabilities as at 31st December 2003 include £192m (2002: £318m) raised from the securitisation of investment debt securities (see Note 17).
30 Accruals and deferred income
31 Deferred tax
The movements on deferred tax during the year were:
No tax (2002: £nil) has been calculated on capital gains that might arise on the disposal of Barclays Bank PLC at the amounts at which it is stated. The Directors are of the opinion that the likelihood of any such tax liability arising in the foreseeable future is remote. Tax would become payable only if the investment (and consequently virtually all of the Groups activities) were disposed of. The amount of tax payable would be dependent upon the level of capital losses available within the Barclays Group to reduce any capital gains that may arise.
No tax has been calculated on capital gains (2002: £nil) that might arise on the disposal of properties at their balance sheet amounts. The aggregate disposal of the property portfolio would not be expected to give rise to a significant gain or loss. Tax would become payable only if property were sold without it being possible to claim rollover relief. At present, it is not envisaged that any tax will become payable in the foreseeable future.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 131
31 Deferred tax (continued)
The fair values of certain derivatives and financial instruments are disclosed in Note 46. For trading balances, where fair values are recognised in the financial statements and mark to market movements included in the profit and loss account, the gains and losses are subject to current tax and no deferred tax arises. In the case of derivatives used for asset and liability management purposes, tax arises when the gain or loss is recognised in the profit and loss account at the same time as the hedged item. Where fair values are disclosed but not recognised, tax would arise if the assets were sold at their fair value. Tax of £900m (2002: £1,106m) would become payable on the sale of the non-trading financial assets for which a valuation has been given.
Deferred tax assets have not been recognised on tax losses to the extent that they are not regarded as recoverable in the foreseeable future. The unrecognised asset of £4m (2002: £24m) would be regarded as recoverable to the extent that, on the basis of all available evidence, it was more likely than not that there would be suitable taxable profits from which the tax losses could be deducted.
No deferred tax is recognised on the unremitted earnings of overseas subsidiary undertakings, associated undertakings and joint ventures. Such earnings form part of the balance sheet value and are therefore included in the deferred tax of subsidiaries.
32 Other provisions for liabilities and charges
Customer loyalty provisions are made with respect to anticipated future claims on redemption under the Groups customer loyalty bonus scheme. Sundry provisions are made with respect to commission clawbacks, warranties, cost of customer redress and litigation claims.
The Group has a restructuring programme, largely focused on activities within the UK, which involve the reshaping of the Groups operations through the centralisation of core processes, application of new technologies, and reduction of workforce. It is anticipated that the majority of remaining liabilities and charges will be utilised in 2004.
132
33 Undated loan capital
Undated loan capital, issued by the Bank for the development and expansion of the Groups business and to strengthen its capital base comprised:
Security and subordination
The Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes (the Junior Notes) rank behind the claims against the Bank of depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors and holders of dated loan capital.
All other issues of the Banks undated loan capital rank pari passu with each other and behind the claims of the holders of Junior Notes, except for the 6% and 6.86% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes (the TONs) and the 8.55%, 7.375% and 7.5% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (the RCIs) (such issues, excluding the TONs and the RCIs, being the Undated Notes and Loans).
The TONs and the RCIs rank pari passu with each other and behind the claims of the holders of the Undated Notes and Loans.
In accordance with the Barclays Group Reorganisation Act 2002, the 9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds of Woolwich plc were transferred to the Bank by operation of law on 1st December 2003 and accordingly the Bank has become the obligor for this issue from that date.
Interest
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 133
33 Undated loan capital (continued)
The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its Undated Notes and Loans excluding the 9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds if, in the preceding six months, a dividend has not been declared or paid on any class of shares of Barclays PLC or, in certain cases, any class of preference shares of the Bank. The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its 9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds if, in the immediately preceding twelve months interest period, a dividend has not been paid on any class of its share capital. Interest not so paid becomes payable in each case if such a dividend is subsequently paid or in certain other circumstances.
No payment of principal or any interest on any such undated loan capital may be made unless the Bank satisfies a specified solvency test.
The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the RCIs for any period of time. Whilst such deferral is continuing, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of its ordinary shares or preference shares.
The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the TONs if it determines that it is, or such payment would result in it being, in non-compliance with capital adequacy requirements and policies of the Financial Services Authority. Any such deferred payment of interest will only be payable on a redemption of the TONs. Until such time as the Bank next makes a payment of interest on the TONs, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may (a) declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of their respective ordinary shares or preference shares, or make payments of interest in respect of the RCIs and (b) certain restrictions on the redemption, purchase or reduction of their respective share capital and certain other securities also apply.
Interest payable on undated loan capital amounted to £451m (2002: £407m, 2001: £345m).
Repayment and conversion
In addition, each issue of undated loan capital is repayable, at the option of the Bank in whole for certain tax reasons, either at any time, or on an interest payment date. There are no events of default except non-payment of principal or mandatory interest. Any repayments require the prior approval of the Financial Services Authority.
All issues of undated loan capital have been made in the eurocurrency market and/or under Rule 144A, and no issues have been registered under the US Securities Act of 1933.
134
34 Dated loan capital
Dated loan capital, issued by the Bank for the development and expansion of the Groups business and to strengthen its capital base, and by Barclays Bank of Botswana Ltd (BBB) and Barclays Bank Zambia PLC (Barclays Zambia) to enhance their respective capital bases, comprise:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 135
34 Dated loan capital (continued)
None of the Groups dated loan capital is secured. The debt obligations of the Bank, BBB and Barclays Zambia rank ahead of the interests of holders of their equity. Dated loan capital of the Bank, BBB and Barclays Zambia has been issued on the basis that the claims thereunder are subordinated to the respective claims of their depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors.
In accordance with the Barclays Group Reorganisation Act 2002, the 5.25% Subordinated Notes 2011, the Step-up Callable Floating Rate Subordinated Bonds 2012, the 10.125% Subordinated Notes 2017 and the 9.5% Subordinated Bonds 2021 of Woolwich plc were transferred to the Bank by operation of law on 1st December 2003 and accordingly the Bank has become the obligor for these issues from that date.
Interest payable on loan capital with a final maturity within five years amounted to £10.7m (2002: £28m, 2001: £14m).
The 7.4% Subordinated Notes 2009 (the 7.4% Notes) issued by the Bank have been registered under the US Securities Act of 1933. All other issues of dated loan capital by the Bank, BBB and Barclays Zambia, which were made in non-US markets, have not been so registered. With respect to the 7.4% Notes, the Bank is not obliged to make (i) a payment of interest on any interest payment date unless a dividend is paid on any class of share capital and (ii) a payment of principal until six months after the respective maturity date with respect to such Notes.
136
Repayment termsUnless otherwise indicated, the Groups dated loan capital outstanding at 31st December 2003 is redeemable only on maturity subject, in particular cases, to provisions allowing an early redemption in the event of certain changes in tax law or, in the case of BBB and Barclays Zambia, to certain changes in legislation or regulations.
Any repayments prior to maturity require in the case of the Bank, the prior approval of the Financial Services Authority, in the case of BBB, the prior approval of the Bank of Botswana and in the case of Barclays Zambia, the prior approval of the Bank of Zambia.
There are no committed facilities in existence at the balance sheet date which permit the refinancing of debt beyond the date of maturity.
35 Called up share capital
The authorised share capital of Barclays PLC is £2,500m (2002: £2,500m), comprising 9,996m (2002: 9,996m) ordinary shares of 25p each and 1m (2002: 1m) staff shares of £1 each.
In 2003, the Company repurchased ordinary shares with a nominal value of £12m at a total cost of £204m. In 2002, ordinary shares with a nominal value of £30m were repurchased at a total cost of £546m.
36 Shares under option
The Group has three current schemes that give employees rights to subscribe for shares in Group companies. A summary of the key terms of the Incentive Share Option Plan (ISOP) and Sharesave (SAYE) are described on pages 12 and 13.
The other current scheme is the BGI Equity Ownership Plan (EOP) which provides for options to be granted to certain management personnel for shares in BGI UK Holdings Ltd, a subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. Under the terms of the Plan, options are normally exercisable upon vesting. One-third of the options will generally vest at each anniversary of the grant date over three years. If unexercised, the options will lapse 10 years after the grant.
At 31st December 2003, 13.5m (2002: 17.8m) options were outstanding under the terms of the BGI EOP (which would represent a 13.81% interest if exercised), enabling certain management personnel to subscribe for shares in BGI UK Holdings Limited between 2004 and 2013 at prices between £6.11 and £10.92. One year following the exercise of the option, the shareholder has the right to sell the shares. Barclays Bank PLC has first refusal to purchase the shares at the most recent agreed valuation. As at 31st December 2003, the most recently agreed valuation was £15.16 (2002: £11.09).
If all the current options were exercised, £128.7m (2002: £158.7m) would be subscribed. At the most recently agreed valuation these shares would be valued at £205.0m, resulting in a gain of £76.3m to the option holders if these shares were sold at this price. Since the scheme was introduced, options over 4.9m (2002: 0.8m) shares have been exercised, of which 4.4m have not been purchased by Barclays Bank PLC and represent a minority interest in Barclays Global Investors Holdings Limited and the Group.
At 31st December 2003, 106m (2002: 127m) options were outstanding under the terms of the SAYE Share Option Scheme, 0.6m (2002: 3.8m) options were outstanding under the terms of the Woolwich SAYE Scheme, 5.9m (2002: 8.2m) options were outstanding under the terms of the Executive Share Option Scheme, 4.4m (2002: 8.8m) options were outstanding under the terms of the Woolwich ESOP and 98.9m (2002: 77.6m) options were outstanding under the terms of the Incentive Share Option Plan, enabling certain Directors and members of staff to subscribe for ordinary shares between 2004 and 2013 at prices ranging from 137p to 562p.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 137
37 Shareholders funds
Opening shareholders funds have been restated due to the adoption of UITF Abstract 37, Purchases and sales of own shares. Further information can be found in the changes in accounting policy on page 105.
The revaluation reserve of Barclays PLC arises from the revaluation of the investment in Barclays Bank PLC.
The decrease in consolidated shareholders funds of £29m (2002: decrease £61m) arising from exchange rate translation differences is net of a related tax credit of £2m (2002: credit £3m).
38 Investment in Barclays Bank PLC
The investment in Barclays Bank PLC is stated in the balance sheet at Barclays PLCs share of the book value of the net assets of Barclays Bank PLC including unamortised goodwill. The net increase of £1,272m during the year comprised the cost of additional shares of £149m and an increase of £1,123m in other net assets of Barclays Bank PLC. The cost of the investment was £7,765m (2002: £7,616m).
Details of principal subsidiary undertakings, held through Barclays Bank PLC, are shown in Note 43.
39 Leasing activities
Aggregate amounts received and receivable during the year under finance leases were £419m (2002: £433m, 2001: £486m), including interest income of £234m (2002: £225m, 2001: £263m).
40 Assets and liabilities denominated in sterling and foreign currencies
41 Assets pledged to secure liabilities
At 31st December 2003, the amount of assets pledged to secure liabilities was £10,666m (2002: £16,109m). The secured liabilities outstanding amounted to £11,777m (2002: £12,151m). A significant proportion of the assets pledged were debt securities.
138
42 Future rental commitments under operating leases
At 31st December 2003, the Group held various leases on land and buildings, many for extended periods, and other leases for equipment.
The aggregate rental payments outstanding at 31st December 2003 fall due as follows:
The aggregate rental payments above include amounts relating to a commitment to lease a new headquarters at Canary Wharf. The rentals for leasehold land, buildings and equipment, included in operating expenses for the year ended 31st December 2003, amounted to £192m (2002: £192m, 2001: £200m).
43 Principal subsidiary undertakings
In accordance with Section 231(5) of the Companies Act 1985, the above information is provided solely in relation to principal subsidiary undertakings. Full information on all subsidiaries will be included with the Annual Return.
With the exception of Barclays Capital Japan Limited which operates in Japan, the country of registration or incorporation is also the principal area of operation for each of the above undertakings. Investments in these undertakings are held directly by Barclays Bank PLC except where marked *.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 139
44 Contingent liabilities and commitments
In common with other banks, the Group conducts business involving acceptances, guarantees, performance bonds and indemnities. The majority of these facilities are offset by corresponding obligations of third parties. In addition, there are other off balance sheet financial instruments, including swaps, futures, forwards and option contracts or combinations thereof (all commonly known as derivatives), the nominal amounts of which are not reflected in the consolidated balance sheet.
Following internationally accepted banking supervisory practice for the calculation of the credit risk associated with such non-derivative off balance sheet items, for the purpose of this Note the contract or underlying principal amounts are either recognised at face value or converted to credit risk equivalents by applying specified conversion factors.
Nature of instrumentsFor a description of the nature of derivative financial instruments, see page 53.
An acceptance is an undertaking by a bank to pay a bill of exchange drawn on a customer. The Group expects most acceptances to be presented, but reimbursement by the customer is normally immediate. Endorsements are residual liabilities of the Group in respect of bills of exchange which have been paid and subsequently rediscounted.
Guarantees and assets pledged as collateral security are generally written by a bank to support the performance of a customer to third parties. As the Group will only be required to meet these obligations in the event of the customers default, the cash requirements of these instruments are expected to be considerably below their nominal amounts.
Other contingent liabilities include transaction related customs and performance bonds and are, generally, short-term commitments to third parties which are not directly dependent on the customers creditworthiness.
Commitments to lend are agreements to lend to a customer in the future, subject to certain conditions. Such commitments are either made for a fixed period, or have no specific maturity but are cancellable by the lender subject to notice requirements.
Documentary credits commit the Group to make payments to third parties on production of documents, which are usually reimbursed immediately by customers.
The following table summarises the nominal principal amount of contingent liabilities and commitments with off balance sheet risk as at 31st December 2003.
As an active participant in international banking markets, the Group has a significant concentration of off balance sheet items with financial institutions, as shown in Note 64.
For a further description of the nature and management of credit risks and market risks, see pages 29 to 50 of the Risk Management section.
UK Obligations to purchase goods and servicesThe table below gives details of the Groups obligations to purchase goods and services at 31st December 2003:
The obligations mainly relate to contracts for the provision of services such as office supplies, telecommunications, maintenance and sponsorship agreements.
140
45 Derivatives and other financial instruments
The Groups objectives and policies in managing the risks that arise in connection with the use of financial instruments are set out on pages 25 to 57 under the headings Risk Management and Control Overview; Market Risk Management and Treasury Asset and Liability Management. Short-term debtors and creditors are included in the following interest rate repricing and non-trading currency risk tables. All other disclosures in Note 45 exclude these short-term balances.
Interest rate sensitivity gap analysisThe table below summarises the repricing profiles of the Groups non-trading book as at 31st December 2003. Items are allocated to time bands by reference to the earlier of the next contractual interest rate repricing date and the maturity date.
Interest rate repricing as at 31st December 2003
Total assets and liabilities exclude retail life-fund assets and liabilities. These are not relevant in considering the interest rate risk of the Group.
Trading balances for the purposes of this table are those, within Barclays Capital, where the risk is managed by DVaR (see pages 48 to 50).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 141
45 Derivatives and other financial instruments (continued)
Interest rate repricing as at 31st December 2002
Non-trading currency riskNon-trading currency risk exposure arises principally from the Groups investments in overseas branches and subsidiary and associated undertakings, principally in the United States, Japan and Europe.
The Groups structural currency exposures at 31st December 2003 were as follows:
In accordance with Group policy, as at 31st December 2003 and 31st December 2002, there were no material net currency exposures in the non-trading book relating to transactional (or non-structural) positions that would give rise to net currency gains and losses recognised in the profit and loss account. Instruments used in hedging non-trading exposures are described on pages 54 to 57.
142
Daily Value at RiskThe Daily Value at Risk (DVaR) methodology of estimating potential losses arising from the Groups exposure to market risk is explained on pages 48 to 50. The models used in estimating potential losses are based on past movements and may not be indicative of future market conditions. The following table shows an analysis of DVaR for the market risk exposures in Barclays Capital as an average for the year and the high and low during the year.
The hedging tables below summarise, firstly, the unrecognised gains and losses on hedges at 31st December 2003 and 31st December 2002 and the movements therein during the year, and, secondly, the deferred gains and losses on hedges carried forward in the balance sheet at 31st December 2003 and 31st December 2002, pending their recognition in the profit and loss account.
Where a non-trading derivative no longer represents a hedge because the underlying non-trading asset, liability or position has been de-recognised or transferred into a trading portfolio, it is restated at fair value and any resultant gains or losses taken directly to the profit and loss account. Gains of £87m (2002: £66m) and losses of £54m (2002: £39m) were recognised in the year to 31st December 2003. The disclosure of the fair value of financial instruments as required by FRS 13 is provided in Note 46 on pages 150 to 151.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 143
Derivatives held or issued for trading purposesThe tables set out below analyse the notional principal amounts and fair values (which, after netting, are the book values) of trading instruments entered into with third parties.
Collateral held that reduced credit risk in respect of derivative instruments at 31st December 2003, but did not meet the offset criteria amounted to £672m (2002: £591m).
144
Collateral held that reduced credit risk in respect of derivative instruments at 31st December 2002, but did not meet the offset criteria amounted to £591m (2001: £238m).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 145
Derivative financial instruments held for the purpose of managing non-trading exposuresThe following table, which includes only the derivative components of the Groups hedging programme, summarises the nominal values, fair values and book values of derivatives held for the purpose of managing non-trading exposures. Included in the amounts below were £10,685m (2002: £10,984m) contract amount of foreign exchange derivatives and £200,126m (2002: £192,463m) of interest rate derivatives which were made for asset and liability management purposes with independently managed dealing units of the Group.
At 31st December 2002, the total positive book value of derivatives held for the purposes of managing non-trading exposures was £1,834m. The total negative book value of such contracts at 31st December 2002 was £1,824m.
The nominal amounts of OTC foreign exchange derivatives held to manage the non-trading exposure of the Group analysed by currency and final maturity are as follows:
146
Maturity of notional principal amounts as at 31st December 2003At 31st December 2003, the notional principal amounts, by residual maturity, of the Groups trading and non-trading derivatives were as follows:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 147
Maturity of notional principal amounts as at 31st December 2002At 31st December 2002, the notional principal amounts, by residual maturity, of the Groups trading and non-trading derivatives were as follows:
148
Maturity analyses of replacement cost and counterparty analyses of net replacement costThe fair value of a derivative contract represents the amount at which that contract could be exchanged in an arms-length transaction, calculated at market rates current at the balance sheet date. The totals of positive and negative fair values arising on trading derivatives at the balance sheet date have been netted where the Group has a legal right of offset with the relevant counterparty. The total positive fair value after permitted netting equates to net replacement cost.
The residual replacement cost by maturity and net replacement cost by counterparty analyses of OTC and non-margined exchange traded derivatives held for trading and non-trading purposes at 31st December 2003 and 31st December 2002 are as follows:
Potential credit risk exposureThe potential credit risk exposure for each product equals net replacement cost as reduced by the fair value of collateral provided by the counterparty.
At 31st December 2003 and 31st December 2002, the potential credit risk exposures in respect of the Groups trading and non-trading OTC derivatives were not significantly different to net replacement cost.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 149
46 Fair values of financial instruments
Financial instruments include both financial assets and financial liabilities and also derivatives. The fair value of a financial instrument is the amount at which the instrument could be exchanged in a current transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale.
Wherever possible, the Group has estimated fair value using market prices or data available for instruments with characteristics either identical or similar to those of the instruments held by the Group. In certain cases, however, including loans and advances to customers, no ready markets currently exist in the UK wherein exchanges between willing parties occur. Accordingly, various techniques have been developed to estimate what the fair value of such instruments might be.
These estimation techniques are necessarily subjective in nature and involve several assumptions. There have been no significant changes in the estimation techniques or the methodology used compared with those used at 31st December 2002.
Because a variety of estimation techniques are employed and significant estimates made, comparisons of fair values between financial institutions may not be meaningful. Readers of these accounts are thus advised to use caution when using this data to evaluate the Groups financial position.
Fair value information is not provided for items that do not meet the definitions of a financial instrument. These items include short-term debtors and creditors, intangible assets such as the value of the Groups branch network, the long-term relationships with depositors (core deposit intangibles), premises and equipment and shareholders equity. These items are material and accordingly the fair value information presented does not purport to represent, nor should it be construed to represent, the underlying value of the Group as a going concern at 31st December 2003.
The following table shows the carrying amount and the fair value of the Groups financial instruments analysed between trading and non-trading assets and liabilities.
150
46 Fair values of financial instruments (continued)
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 151
47 Legal proceedings
Proceedings have been brought in the US against a number of defendants including Barclays following the collapse of Enron. In each case the claims are against groups of defendants and it is not possible to estimate Barclays possible loss, if any, in relation to them. Barclays considers that the claims against it are without merit and is defending them vigorously. A court ordered mediation commenced in September 2003 but no material progress has been made towards a resolution of the litigation.
Barclays is engaged in various other litigation proceedings both in the UK and a number of overseas jurisdictions, including the US, involving claims by and against it, which arise in the ordinary course of business.
Barclays does not expect the ultimate resolution of any of the proceedings to which Barclays is party to have a significant adverse effect on the financial position or profitability of the Group.
48 Reconciliation of operating profit to net cash flow from operating activities
152
49 Sale of Group undertakings during the year
In 2002 the balance transferred to associated undertakings comprised the Groups share of the net assets disposed of and the Groups share of the net assets acquired from the Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce and goodwill thereon. Fair value adjustments of (£1m) were applied to the assets acquired primarily relating to loans and advances to customers and customer accounts.
50 Changes in financing during the year
The following table does not include the premium of £192m paid in respect of the repurchase of ordinary shares or the Groups contributions to the Qualifying Employee Share Ownership Trust (QUEST) of £36m.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 153
51 Analysis of cash balances
52 Analysis of the net outflow of cash in respect of the acquisition of subsidiary undertakings
53 Acquisitions
The Group made the following significant acquisitions of Group undertakings in 2003 which are accounted for on an acquisition basis:
The book value in the above table reflects all acquisitions made in the year.
154
54 Related party transactions
a) Subsidiary undertakingsDetails of the principal subsidiary undertakings are shown in Note 43. In accordance with FRS 8, transactions or balances between Group entities that have been eliminated on consolidation are not reported.
b) Associated undertakings and joint venturesThe Group provides certain banking and financial services for associated undertakings and joint ventures. These are conducted on similar terms to third party transactions and are not material to the Groups results. Details of lendings to associated undertakings and joint ventures are set out in Notes 14 and 15.
Edotech Limited, an associated undertaking, provides printing services to the Group. The cost of these services provided in the year was £31.1m (2002: £24.1m, 2001: £22.9m). At the year end, a balance outstanding of £3.0m was included in sundry creditors (2002: £2.3m).
Intelligent Processing Systems Limited (IPSL) is a joint venture between the Group, Lloyds TSB Bank PLC, HSBC Bank plc and Unisys Limited. The Bank has outsourced its cheque processing services to IPSL. The cost of these core services to the Barclays Group in the UK provided in the year was £26.7m (2002: £30.2m, 2001: £30.5m). At the year end, a balance outstanding of £1.7m was included in sundry creditors (2002: £2.2m). In addition, a further £16.6m was included in prepayments and accrued income (2002: £6.3m).
Gresham Insurance Company Limited (Gresham) became an associated undertaking following the acquisition of Woolwich plc. The arrangement enables Gresham to underwrite major household insurances provided to customers of the Group. Underwriting payments made to Gresham during the year were £44.8m (2002: £54.9m, 2001: £53.2m) and balances outstanding of £53.2m (2002: £6.9m) are included in trade creditors.
Global Home Loans Limited (GHL) is an associated undertaking of the Group. Mortgage origination and processing activities are outsourced to GHL and its subsidiaries. The fees payable to GHL during the year were £100.7m (2002: £57.9m, 2001: £45.6m). At the year end, £11.2m was payable to GHL (2002: £8.9m).
Gabetti Holding SpA, an associated undertaking, acts as an introducer of mortgage business to Banca Woolwich SpA and received commission of £5.1m in 2003 (2002: £7.0m, 2001: £7.3m). At the year end, there were no amounts outstanding (2002: £1.0m sundry creditors).
Littlewoods Personal Finance Limited is a joint venture between the Group and Littlewoods PLC. The Group provides a retail financial service to Littlewoods Personal Finance Limited retail customers and charged £4.4m during 2003 for account servicing, maintenance and development costs (2002: £1.7m, 2001: £0.8m). During 2003, Littlewoods Personal Finance Limited provided marketing services to the Group for which a fee of £5.1m was paid (2002: £5.3m, 2001: £2.9m). At 31st December 2003, £0.8m was owed to Littlewoods Personal Finance Limited (2002: £2.2m). There was no amount outstanding from Littlewoods Personal Finance Limited at that date (2002: £nil).
Xansa Barclaycard Partnership Limited (formerly Barshelfco (No 73) Limited) became a joint venture between the Group and Xansa PLC on 1st February 2002. The company delivers IT services to Barclaycard. The IT service contract has an estimated minimum value of £125m over five years. The cost of providing these services to Group during the year was £37.2m (2002: £38.5m, 2001: £nil). At 31st December 2003 £1.4m (2002: £0.6m) was owed to Xansa Barclaycard Partnership Limited.
FirstCaribbean International Bank Limited became an associate of the Group in October 2002 following the combination of the Caribbean retail, corporate and offshore banking operations of Barclays and Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce. As part of this transaction, the bank has agreed to ensure that the pension scheme assets are sufficient to cover the pension fund liabilities of the affected employees. At 31st December 2003, a provision of £20m (2002: £20m) is held to cover this liability. Barclaycard received management fees of £1.2m (2002: £0.2m) in respect of credit card services supplied to FirstCaribbean Investment Bank in 2003.
c) Pension funds, unit trusts and investment fundsThe Group provides a number of normal current and interest bearing cash accounts to the Group pension funds (principally the UK Retirement Fund, the 1951 Fund and the Woolwich Pension Fund) in order to facilitate the day to day financial administration of the funds. Group companies, principally Barclays Global Investors, also provide investment management and custodian services. The Group also provides normal banking services for unit trust and investment funds managed by Group companies. These are all conducted on similar terms to third party transactions and are not individually material. In aggregate, amounts included in the accounts are as follows:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 155
54 Related party transactions (continued)
d) DirectorsDetails of Directors emoluments are set out in Note 55 and further information on Directors emoluments, shareholdings, options and awards is given in the Barclays report on remuneration on pages 11 to 22.
In the ordinary course of business, the Bank makes loans to companies where a Director or officer is also a Director of Barclays. With the exception of an interest free loan of £0.5m to the Charities Aid Foundation group of which Sir Brian Jenkins is President of Trustees, these loans are made on substantially the same criteria and terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with other persons and did not involve more than the normal risk of collectibility or present other unfavourable features. The interest free loan to the Charities Aid Foundation group was repaid in full in 2003.
Xansa PLC, of which Hilary Cropper CBE is Honorary President, provides software support and development resource capability to the Group. The total value of these transactions for the year ending 31st December 2003 was £10.6m (2002: £14.3m, 2001: £21.5m). This is in addition to the transactions with Xansa Barclaycard Partnership Limited discussed in Note (b) above.
Cable and Wireless PLC, of which Graham Wallace was Chief Executive until April 2003 has a telecommunications services contract with the Group. This was awarded as part of a competitive tender activity. The cost to the Group during 2003 for the provision of these services was £5.2m (2002: £2.2m).
55 Directors and officers emoluments and other benefits
The aggregate emoluments and other benefits of the Directors of Barclays PLC set out below are disclosed in accordance with Part I of Schedule 6 to the Companies Act 1985.
As at 31st December 2003, two Directors were accruing retirement benefits under a defined benefit scheme (2002: three Directors).
For US disclosure purposes, the aggregate emoluments of all Directors and officers of Barclays PLC who held office during the year (2003: 27 persons, 2002: 27 persons) for the year ended 31st December 2003 amounted to £51,215,000 (2002: £44,290,000). In addition, the aggregate amount set aside for the year ended 31st December 2003, to provide pension benefits for the Directors and officers amounted to £1,741,000 (2002: £1,446,000). The aggregate emoluments of all Directors and officers of Barclays Bank PLC who held office during the year (2003: 28 persons, 2002: 29 persons) for the year ended 31st December 2003 amounted to £51,328,000 (2002: £44,356,000). In addition, the aggregate amount set aside by the Bank and its subsidiary undertakings, for the year ended 31st December 2003, to provide pension benefits for the Directors and officers amounted to £1,741,000 (2002: £1,447,000).
Having reviewed the definition of officers for US disclosure purposes, the Group now includes all direct reports of the Group CEO and heads of major business units in the definition. The 2002 figures detailed above have been adjusted accordingly.
56 Directors and officers shareholding and options
The beneficial ownership of the ordinary share capital of Barclays PLC by all Directors and officers of Barclays PLC (involving 23 persons) and Barclays Bank PLC (involving 24 persons) at 31st December 2003 amounted to 1,371,584 ordinary shares of 25p each (0.02% of ordinary share capital outstanding).
Executive Directors and officers of Barclays PLC as a group (involving 14 persons) held, at 31st December 2003, options to purchase 25,358,331 Barclays PLC ordinary shares of 25p each at prices ranging from 308p to 411p under the SAYE Share Option Scheme, and ranging from 347p to 397p under the Executive Share Option Scheme and ranging from 326p to 534p under the Incentive Share Option Plan, respectively.
156
57 Contracts with Directors and connected persons and with managers
The aggregate amounts outstanding at 31st December 2003 under transactions, arrangements and agreements made by authorised institutions within the Group for persons who are, or were during the year, Directors of Barclays PLC and persons connected with them and for managers, within the meaning of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, of Barclays Bank PLC were:
There are no transactions, arrangements or agreements with Barclays PLC or its subsidiary undertakings in which Directors, or persons connected with them, or managers of Barclays Bank PLC had a material interest and which are disclosable under the relevant provisions of the Companies Act 1985, other than options to subscribe for Barclays PLC ordinary shares as described in Note 56.
58 Other entities
At 31st December 2003 the Group had investments in four subsidiaries that amounted to £0.25m (2002:nil). Under UK GAAP, these subsidiaries were excluded from consolidation into the Groups financial statements, either on the grounds that the Group could not direct the financial and operating policies or on the grounds that another group has a superior economic interest. In each of these cases the subsidiaries were consolidated within the financial statements under UK GAAP of another group.
Although the Groups interest in the equity voting rights in certain investments is 20% or more, the Directors do not consider them to be participating interests (within the meaning of Section 260, Companies Act 1985) and consequently they are not treated as associated undertakings since the Group does not exercise significant influence over the activities of these investments. The carrying value of these investments as at 31st December 2003 was £12.8m (2002: £23.3m).
There are a number of entities that do not qualify as subsidiary undertakings but which give rise to benefits that are in substance no different from those that would arise were the entity a subsidiary. In accordance with the disclosure required by FRS 5, the summarised combined results of these entities, which are included in the Group consolidated results, by type of entity for each main financial statement heading where there are material items, are set out below. They are categorised according to the activities in which they are engaged, further discussion of which is included in Note 61(r).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 157
59 Segmental analysis
The Group reports the results of its operations through eight business segments: Personal Financial Services, Barclays Private Clients, Barclaycard, Business Banking, Barclays Africa, Barclays Capital, Barclays Global Investors and Head office functions and other operations.
Personal Financial Services provides retail products and services including current accounts, mortgages, consumer loans and general insurance throughout the UK. Barclays Private Clients provides banking and asset management services to affluent and high net worth clients. Barclaycard provides credit card services across Europe and Africa. Business Banking provides relationship banking to small, medium-sized and large business customers in the UK. Barclays Africa provides banking services to personal and corporate customers in North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa and islands in the Indian Ocean. Barclays Capital conducts the Groups investment banking business providing corporate, institutional and government clients with financing and risk management products. Barclays Global Investors provides investment management products and services to international institutional clients. Head office functions and other operations comprise all the Groups central function costs and other central items together with the results of Transition Businesses.
158
59 Segmental analysis (continued)
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 159
160
60 Retirement benefits
As disclosed in Note 4, Barclays accounts for pensions in accordance with SSAP 24. The disclosure in Note 4 sets out details of the assumptions underlying the SSAP 24 valuation.
FRS 17 Retirement Benefits will be effective for companies subject to UK accounting standards for years beginning on or after 1st January 2005. In 2003, the standard requires disclosures to be made of the amount of the asset or liability that would have been recognised in the balance sheet and the amounts that would have been recognised in the performance statements if the standard had been implemented.
As described in Note 4, Barclays provides pension plans for employees in most parts of the world. For the purposes of the standard, the UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) and other defined benefit pension schemes in the UK, US, Germany and Spain, are considered to be material. The scheme in Germany and one of the US schemes are unfunded. The disclosures below reflect interim actuarial valuations as at 31st December 2003 by a professionally qualified independent actuary using the projected unit method. This method results in the current service cost in respect of closed schemes (primarily 1964 Pension Scheme) increasing as the members of the scheme approach retirement.
The protected rights contributions in respect of RIS and PIP were £10m for RIS and PIP members in 2003 with expected contributions for PIP only of £4m next year. Other UKRF payments include a £500m contribution in December 2003 as described in Note 4. Other UK schemes paid contributions of £14m in the year (2002: £27m) and are expected to pay contributions of £5m next year. Overseas schemes paid contributions of £3m in the year (2002: £1m) and are expected to pay contributions of £3m next year.
The main financial assumptions used in the actuarial valuations were:
The value of the assets and liabilities of the schemes, the assumed long-term real rates of return and the assets and liabilities at 31st December 2003 and 31st December 2002 were as follows:
Net deficit in UK schemes at 31st December 2003 includes a deficit of £1,586m (2002: deficit of £1,311m) relating to the UKRF.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 161
60 Retirement benefits (continued)
The surpluses and deficits relating to pension schemes would be presented in the balance sheet as follows:
As described in Note 4, the Group also provides post-retirement health care to certain UK and US pensioners. Where appropriate, provisions for such benefits are recognised on an actuarial basis. The disclosures below reflect actuarial valuations as at 31st December 2003 by a professionally qualified independent actuary. 2002 disclosures have been adjusted to exclude obligations accounted for under FRS 12. The rate of increase in medical expenses used in the actuarial valuation was 5.75% in the UK (2002: 4.8%) and 5% in the US (2002: 4.75%) and the discount rate used was 5.5% in the UK (2002: 5.7%) and 6.25% in the US (2002: 6.75%).
The deficit relating to post-retirement health care would be presented in the balance sheet as follows:
The net reserve for pension schemes and post-retirement health care is £1,180m (2002: £1,110m).
The amounts that would have been recognised in the profit and loss account and statement of total recognised gains and losses in respect of pension schemes and post-retirement health care in 2003 were as follows:
162
Contributions of £669m include a payment of £500m in December 2003, as described in Note 4.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 163
61 Differences between UK GAAP and US GAAP accounting principles
The accounts presented in this report have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the UK (UK GAAP). Such principles vary in significant respects from those generally accepted in the United States (US GAAP). Preparing the financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect reported income, expenses, assets and liabilities and disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities. Actual results could be different from those estimates. The significant differences applicable to the Groups accounts are summarised below.
164
61 Differences between UK GAAP and US GAAP accounting principles (continued)
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 165
166
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 167
168
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 169
Applicable developments in US GAAP
SFAS 143: Accounting for Asset Retirement ObligationsIn June 2001, the FASB issued SFAS No. 143 Accounting for Asset Retirement Obligations. SFAS 143 requires a provision to be raised for the legal obligation in relation to the other-than-temporary removal of a tangible fixed asset, at fair value, when incurred. The Standard was effective for the Group from 1st January 2003. Adoption did not have a material effect on the Groups financial condition or results of operations as determined under US GAAP.
SFAS 146: Accounting for costs associated with exits or disposalsIn June 2002, the FASB issued SFAS No. 146 Accounting for Costs Associated with Exits or Disposals. SFAS 146 addresses the financial accounting and reporting for costs associated with exit or disposal activities and requires that the fair value of a liability for a cost associated with an exit or disposal activity be recognised when the liability is incurred and nullifies EITF 94-3 which requires the recognition of a liability at the date of an entitys commitment to an exit plan. SFAS 146 is effective from 1st January 2003 and was adopted by the Group during the year ended 31st December 2003. Adoption did not have a material effect on the Groups financial condition or results of operations as determined under US GAAP.
EITF Issue 02-03: Issues involved in accounting for derivative contracts held for trading purposes and contracts involved in Energy Trading and Risk Management activitiesThe principal requirement affecting the Group is that, for energy derivative contracts with effect from July 2002 and non-energy contracts with effect from 21st November 2002, where the fair value is not determined using either observable market prices or models which use market-observable variables as inputs, the unrealised gain or loss at inception on new contracts should not be recognised.
Adoption did not have a material effect on the Groups financial condition or results of operations as determined under US GAAP in 2002. The impact in 2003 is reflected in Note 61(o) on page 182.
FIN 45: Guarantors accounting and disclosure requirements for guarantees, including indirect guarantees of indebtedness of othersIn November 2002, the FASB issued FASB Interpretation No. 45 Guarantors accounting and disclosure requirements for guarantees, including indirect guarantees of indebtedness of others. FIN 45 requires a liability to be recognised for all obligations assumed under guarantees issued and requires disclosure by guarantors in respect of guarantees issued (including guarantees embedded in other contracts). The disclosure requirements are effective for periods ending after 15th December 2002 and are reflected on pages 187 to 188 in this report. The measurement requirements are effective for guarantees issued from 1st January 2003 and were adopted by the Group during the year ended 31st December 2003. The impact in 2003 on net income of £(8)m is shown on page 172.
FIN 46: Consolidation of variable interest entitiesIn January 2003, the FASB issued FIN 46 Consolidation of Variables Interest Entities, as an interpretation of Accounting Research Bulletin No. 51, Consolidated Financial Statements. This was revised in December 2003 and reissued as FIN 46-R. FIN 46 addresses consolidation of variable interest entities (VIEs) by parties holding variable interests in these entities. An entity is considered a VIE if the equity investment at risk is not sufficient to permit the entity to finance its activities without additional subordinated financial support or if the equity investors lack one of three characteristics of a controlling financial interest. First, the equity investors lack the ability to make decisions about the entitys activities through voting rights or similar rights. Second, they do not bear the obligation to absorb the expected losses of the entity if they occur. Lastly, they do not claim the right to receive expected returns of the entity if they occur, which is the compensation for the risk of absorbing the expected losses.
FIN 46 requires that VIEs be consolidated by the interest holder exposed to the majority of the entitys expected losses or residual returns, that is, the primary beneficiary.
In accordance with the transition provisions of FIN 46, the Group adopted FIN 46 immediately for all VIEs created or acquired after 31st January 2003 and as at 31st December 2003 consolidates certain asset securitisation entities described in Note 61(p) on page 183. The Group will adopt FIN 46-R for all VIEs in 2004. Disclosures in relation to the nature, size and potential maximum loss in relation to other VIEs created or acquired before 1st February 2003 where it is reasonably possible the Group will consolidate these entities on adoption of FIN 46-R, or where the Group is not the primary beneficiary but has a significant variable interest are reflected in Note 61(p) of this report.
170
SFAS 132: Employers disclosures about pensions and other post-retirement benefits
The additional disclosures for plans established in the UK are generally required for the year ended 31st December 2003 and are included in Note 61(c) below. The remaining disclosures including those in respect of foreign plans are required for years ending after 15th June 2004 and therefore will be adopted by the Group during the year ended 31st December 2004.
SFAS 150: Accounting for certain financial instruments with characteristics of both liability and equity
The Group has adopted the applicable provisions of SFAS No. 150 to all financial instruments entered into or modified after 31st May 2003 during the year ended 31st December 2003. Adoption did not have a material effect on the Groups financial condition or results of operations as determined under US GAAP. The Group will adopt the Standard for other financial instruments during the six months ending 30th June 2004. Management does not expect adoption to have a material effect on the firms financial condition or results of operations as determined under US GAAP.
SOP 03-3: Accounting for Certain Loans or Debt Securities Acquired in a TransferThe SOP addresses accounting for differences between the contractual cash flows and cash flows expected to be collected from an investors initial investment in loans or debt securities acquired in a transfer if those differences are attributable to credit quality. This SOP is effective for loans acquired in accounting periods beginning after 15th December 2004. Barclays is currently assessing the impact of this SOP on its US GAAP reconciliations.
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)The European Parliament and Council of the European Union issued a regulation in 2002 that will require all EU listed companies to prepare their consolidated accounts in accordance with IFRS rather than the existing national GAAP. The regulation takes effect from 2005 and consequently the accounting framework under which the Group reports will change. The Group will produce its consolidated accounts in accordance with IFRS for the year ended 31st December 2005. Barclays is currently assessing the impact of this change on its US GAAP reconciliations. For further details on the conversion to IFRS, see pages 105 to 106.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 171
Selected financial data, adjusted from UK GAAP to reflect the main differences from US GAAP, is given on page 204.
172
(a) Goodwill
The current carrying value of goodwill for US GAAP purposes has been allocated to the reportable business clusters of the Group:
Included within exchange and other is £186m relating to goodwill previously recognised within Barclaycard and Barclays Global Investors, which on further investigation represents other intangible assets and has been reflected in the table below. The impact of prior year amortisation being recorded in the current year is a reduction in net income of £64m.
(b) Intangible assets
The amortisation expense for the net carrying amount of intangible assets is estimated to be £146m in 2004, £121m in 2005, £119m in 2006, £81m in 2007 and £17m in 2008.
(c) Pensions and post-retirement benefits
The excess of pension plan assets over the projected benefit obligation, as at the transition date, is recognised as a reduction of pension expense on a prospective basis over approximately 15 years.
The provisions of US GAAP have been applied to the main UK pension scheme, the UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) and the Woolwich Pension Fund (WPF) based on a valuation date of 30th September 2003. Consequently the £500m contribution made to the UKRF in December 2003 is excluded from the US GAAP analysis. The following analysis relates to the UKRF (1964 Pension Scheme, Retirement Investment Scheme and Pension Investment Plan) and the WPF which together make up approximately 95% of all the Groups schemes in terms of assets and actuarial liabilities.
Under the terms of an agreement between the Bank, the Trustees of the WPF and the Trustees of the UKRF, the liabilities in respect of all pensioners and deferred pensioners, along with consenting active members of the WPF, were transferred into the UKRF on 14th February 2003. Payments were made on 1st July 2003, with the WPF Trustees transferring assets worth £418m and Woolwich plc making a special contribution of £138m on 4th July 2003.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 173
(c) Pensions and post-retirement benefits (continued)
For measurement purposes, the calculation assumes a 12% and 5% annual rate of increase in the per capita cost of covered medical benefits and dental benefits respectively for pensioners in schemes in the US. The medical benefit rate is further assumed to reduce steadily each year to 5% in 2008 and remain at that level thereafter.
For pensioners in schemes in the UK a 5.6% annual rate of increase in the per capita cost of covered medical benefits is assumed.
A one percentage point change in assumed health care trend rates would have the following effects for 2003:
The following table presents the estimated funded status of the pension schemes and post-retirement benefits (the latter are unfunded) under US GAAP:
174
A long-term strategy has been set for the pension plan asset allocations which comprises a mixture of equities, bonds, property and other appropriate assets. This recognises that different asset classes are likely to produce different long-term returns, and some asset classes will be more volatile than others.
One of the factors in the choice of a long-term strategy is to ensure that the investments are adequately diversified. The managers are permitted some flexibility to vary the asset allocation from the long-term strategy within control ranges agreed with the Trustee from time to time.
The table below shows the percentage of the fair value of each major category as at the measurement date.
The expected return on assets is determined by calculating a total return estimate based on a weighted average of estimated returns for each asset class. Asset class returns are estimated using current and projected economic and market factors such as inflation, credit spreads and equity risk premiums.
Employer cash contributions for the year to 31st December 2004 for the UKRF and WPF schemes are expected to be £4m and £3m respectively.
In accordance with US GAAP requirements, the actuaries for the pension plans used the following assumptions on a weighted average basis; discount rate of 5.4% (2002: 5.3%, 2001: 6.0%), rate of compensation increase of 4.1% (2002: 3.75%, 2001: 4.0%), and expected long-term rate of return on plan assets of 6.8% (2002: 6.8%, 2001: 7.5%).
Details of the post-retirement health care expense under UK GAAP are given in Note 4 to the accounts.
In accordance with the US GAAP requirements, the accounting for the post-retirement benefits charge assumed a discount rate of 6.25% (2002: 6.75%, 2001: 7.25%) for US benefits and 5.4% (2002: 5.3%, 2001: 6.0%) for UK benefits on a weighted average basis.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 175
(d) Deferred tax
176
(e) Compensation arrangements
The SFAS 123 charge for the fair value of options granted since 1995 is £73m (2002: £82m, 2001: £81m).
The net charge with respect to other deferred compensation plans is £1m (2002: £nil, 2001: £nil).
The Executive Share Option Scheme (ESOS), Save As You Earn (SAYE), Incentive Share Option Plan (ISOP), the BGI Equity Ownership Plan (EOP), the Woolwich Executive Share Option Plan (Woolwich ESOP) and the Woolwich SAYE scheme fall within the scope of SFAS 123.
Analysis of the movement in the number and weighted average exercise price of options is set out below.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 177
(e) Compensation arrangements (continued)
Fair values for the ISOP, ESOS, SAYE, the Woolwich ESOP, the Woolwich SAYE and the BGI EOP are calculated at the date of grant using the Black-Scholes model. The significant weighted average assumptions used to estimate the fair value of the options granted in 2003 are as follows:
The range, weighted average exercise price, weighted average remaining contractual life and number of options outstanding, including those exercisable at year end (see page 179), are as follows:
178
The expected dividends for all schemes are assumed to grow in line with the expected increases in share prices for the industry sector until exercise.
The ESOS is a long-term incentive scheme and was available by invitation to certain senior executives of the Group with grants usually made annually. Options were issued at the market price at the date of the grant without any discount, calculated in accordance with the rules of the Scheme, and are normally exercisable between three and ten years from that date. No further awards are made under ESOS.
Eligible employees in the UK may participate in the SAYE. Under this Scheme, employees may enter into contracts to save up to £250 per month and, at the expiry of a fixed term of three, five or seven years, have the option to use these savings to acquire shares in the Company at a discount, calculated in accordance with the rules of the Scheme. The discount is currently 20% of the market price at the date the options were granted.
The ISOP has been introduced to replace the ESOS. It is open by invitation to the employees and Directors of Barclays PLC. Options are granted at the market price at the date of grant calculated in accordance with the rules of the Plan, and are normally exercisable between three and ten years from that date. The final number of shares over which the option may be exercised will be determined by reference to set performance criteria. The number of shares under option represents the maximum possible number that may be exercised.
The BGI Equity Ownership Plan is extended to senior employees of BGI. The exercise price of the options is determined by formula at the date of grant and is not less than the market value of the share at the time of grant. The options are granted over shares in BGI UK Holdings Limited, a subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. Options are normally not exercisable until vesting, with a third of the options held becoming exercisable at each anniversary of grant. Options lapse ten years after grant. At 31st December 2003 13.5m (2002: 17.8m) options were outstanding under the terms of the BGI Equity Ownership Plan enabling certain members of staff to subscribe for shares in BGI UK Holdings Limited between 2004 and 2013 at prices between £6.11 and £10.92.
(f) Shareholders interest in the long-term assurance fund
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 179
Notes to the Accounts
(g) Earnings per share
Net income for the year ended 31st December 2001, adjusted to exclude the amortisation expense related to goodwill of £199m which is no longer amortised following adoption of SFAS 142, was £2,894m. The impact on 2001 EPS of this adjustment would have been to increase both basic and diluted EPS by 3.0p to 43.5p and 43.1p respectively.
UK EPS is detailed in Note 12. Of the total number of employees share options existing at the year end, the following were not included in the dilution calculation above because they were antidilutive:
Certain incentive plan shares have been excluded from the calculation of the basic EPS. These shares are subsequently brought into the diluted earnings per share calculation (called Other schemes) above.
(h) Fair value of securities
All long investment securities are classified as being available for sale unless the Group has a clear intention and ability to hold them to maturity. Other debt securities are classified as trading securities (see Note 17).
180
(h) Fair value of securities (continued)
The Group performs a review of each individual investment security on a regular basis to determine whether any evidence of impairment exists. This review considers factors such as the duration and amount at which fair value is below cost, the credit standing and prospects of the issuer, and the intent and ability of the Group to hold the investment security for such sufficient time to allow for any anticipated recovery in fair value.
Under US GAAP, 87 investment debt securities had unrealised losses as at 31st December 2003. Based on the review performed at 31st December 2003, management believes that the unrealised losses as at that date are temporary in nature. The unrealised losses are due to market moves in interest rates. The credit quality of the bond issuers remains strong with 100% rated as investment grade or higher, and these investments are also intended to be held for the longer term such that their fair value is expected to recover.
(i) Revaluation of property
(j) Loan impairment and disclosure
In accordance with SFAS 114, the Groups total impaired loans are those reported as non-performing on page 39, less impaired loans outside the scope of SFAS 114, and amount to £2,378m at 31st December 2003 (2002: £2,604m). Credit risk provisions of £1,340m, estimated in accordance with SFAS 114, were held against these loans (2002: £1,335m). The average level of such impaired lendings in 2003 was £2,533m (2002: £2,147m).
Where cash received represents the realisation of security, or there is doubt regarding the recovery of a loan, such receipts are treated as repayments of the loan principal. Otherwise, cash received in respect of impaired loans is recognised as interest income. Estimated interest income which was recognised in 2003 on impaired loans within the scope of SFAS 114 was £28m (2002: £5m).
SFAS 114 modifies the accounting for in-substance foreclosure, in that collateralised debts where the Group takes physical possession of the collateral, regardless of formal insolvency procedures, would be reclassified as if the collateral had been acquired for cash. At 31st December 2003, under US GAAP, the amount of collateral recorded at the lower of the book value of the debt or the fair value of the collateral that would be reclassified as other real estate owned was £11m (2002: £6m) and as debt and equity instruments was £48m (2002: £6m).
There are no mortgage loans included within loans and advances to customers which are held with the intention of resale (2002: £830m). During the year £645m of loans were sold (2002: £nil) generating a net loss of £10m (2002: £nil).
(k) Business combination
In 2003, an adjustment of £(4)m was made to the gain of £206m, also recognised under UK GAAP in the Statement of Total Recognised Gains and Losses.
(l) Provisions for restructuring of business
During 2003, a restructuring charge of £209m (2002: £187m, 2001: £171m) was booked under UKGAAP, reflecting severance and other termination costs of £146m (2002: £124m, 2001: £114m), costs in connection with planned disposition of certain facilities £28m (2002: £27m, 2001: £38m) and other related costs of £35m (2002: £36m, 2001: £19m). Of the 2003 charge, £nil has been disallowed for US GAAP purposes. Of the 2002 charge under EITF 94-3, £5m was disallowed in 2002 and charged in 2003. Of the 2001 charge £11m was disallowed in 2001, £4m was charged in 2002 and £7m was charged in 2003. Of the 2000 charge, £10m was disallowed in 2000, £13m was disallowed in 2001, £19m was charged in 2002 and £4m was charged in 2003.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 181
(l) Provisions for restructuring of business (continued)
(m) Internal use software
A review of costs capitalised in previous years and useful lives assigned is undertaken annually. Capitalised costs which are no longer considered recoverable are written off.
(n) Foreign exchange on available for sale securities
Under US GAAP, the change in value of the investments is taken directly to reserves while the offsetting change in sterling terms of the borrowing is taken to the income statement.
A similar difference arises where foreign currency assets are covered using forward contracts but where the Group does not manage these hedges to conform with the detailed US designation requirements.
The impact of this requirement is to transfer net foreign exchange gains or losses on currency securities from net income to other comprehensive income. No difference between the Groups UK and US GAAP shareholders equity arises from this transfer.
(o) Derivatives
The adjustment to net income comprises the following elements:
182
(p) Consolidation
Under US GAAP, the Group consolidates entities in which it has a controlling financial interest. This is determined by initially evaluating whether the entity is a voting interest entity, a variable interest entity (VIE), or a qualifying special purpose entity (QSPE).
Voting interest entities
Variable interest entities
VIEs are consolidated by the interest holder that remains exposed to the majority of the entitys expected losses or residual returns, that is, the primary beneficiary.
The business activities within the Barclays Group where VIEs are used include multi-seller conduit programmes, asset securitisations, client intermediation and the credit structuring.
Multi-seller conduit programmes
Asset securitisations
Client intermediation
Credit structuring
In accordance with the transition provisions of FIN 46, the Group adopted FIN 46 immediately for all VIEs created or acquired after 31st January 2003. The Group is the primary beneficiary in the following variable entities created or acquired after that date:
The creditors do not have recourse to the general credit of the Group in respect of the variable interest entities consolidated by the Group.
Under UK GAAP, the Group consolidates all of the above entities with the exception of certain asset securitisation entities.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 183
(p) Consolidation (continued)
The Group has also created or acquired VIEs prior to 1st February 2003. Where it is reasonably possible the Group will be the primary beneficiary and therefore be required to consolidate the following types of entities on adoption of FIN46-R or that the Group will have a significant variable interest, the maximum loss and total assets have been provided below.
Qualifying Special Purpose Entities (QSPEs)
(q) Securitisations
Investors have no recourse against the Group if cash flows generated from the securitised assets are not sufficient to service the obligations of the QSPEs.
The Group has no right or obligation to repurchase the benefit of any securitised balance, except if certain representations and warranties given by the Group at the time of transfer are breached.
The Group has entered into interest rate currency swaps with the QSPEs. These swaps convert a proportion of the Sterling variable interest flows arising from the Loan Note Certificates to US Dollar variable and fixed rate interest flows to match the interest payable on the Medium Term Notes issued.
184
(q) Securitisations (continued)
The Group estimates the fair value of the retained interests by determining the present value of future expected cash flows using valuation models that incorporate managements best estimates of key assumptions, which include:
(a) the expected prepayment rate of the receivables each year;
The retained interests that are subject to prepayment risk such that the Group may not recover substantially all of its investment are recorded at fair value with subsequent adjustments reflected in net income.
The servicing liability represents the shortfall of future servicing income from the Groups obligation to service the transferred assets compared to the costs of servicing those assets. The servicing liability is amortised over the expected life of the receivables.
Securitisation activity during the year
The derecognition of the securitised assets results in a reduction in net loans and advances to customers of £2,447m.
Interest only strip
Key economic assumptions used in measuring the interest only strip at the time of the securitisation during 2003 were as follows:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 185
The cash flows between the Group and the securitisation vehicles were as follows during the year ended 31st December 2003:
Interest only strip at year end
The sensitivity analysis illustrates the potential magnitude of significant adverse changes in key assumptions used in valuing the interest only strip. However, changes in fair value based on a variation in assumptions generally cannot be extrapolated because the relationship of the change in assumption to the change in fair value may not be linear. Furthermore, the sensitivities for each key variable are calculated independently of changes in the other key variables.
The following table presents information about principal balances of managed and securitised receivables as of and for the year ended 31st December 2003.
186
(r) Fair value amortisation creditFair value adjustments that are different from those recognised under UK GAAP are amortised over the expected life of the relevant asset/liability. This resulted in an additional credit of £8m (2002: £8m, 2001: £8m) under US GAAP.
(s) CollateralUnder a repo (sale and repurchase agreement), an asset is sold to a counterparty with a commitment to repurchase it at a future date at an agreed price. The Group engages in repos and reverse repos, which are the same transaction in the opposite direction, i.e. the Group buying an asset with a fixed commitment to resell.
The following amounts were included in the balance sheet for repos and reverse repos and are reported on a net basis where permitted:
The average and maximum amount of reverse repos for 2003 were £109,315m and £137,025m (2002: £76,215m and £103,895m, 2001: £95,849m and £119,942m) respectively. The average and maximum amount of repos for 2003 were £84,040m and £109,445m (2002: £61,416m and £92,219m, 2001: £88,311m and £116,458m).
Reverse repos and stock borrowing transactions are accounted for as collateralised loans. It is the Groups policy to seek collateral at the outset equal to 100% to 105% of the loan amount. The level of collateral held is monitored daily and further collateral calls made to bring the level of cash held and the market value of collateral in line with the loan balance.
Under certain transactions including reverse repo and stock borrowing transactions the Group is allowed to sell or repledge the collateral held. At 31st December 2003, the fair value of collateral held was £126,085m (2002: £108,935m) of which £91,280m (2002: £93,148m) related to items that have been sold or repledged.
Repos and stock lending transactions are accounted for as secured borrowings. At 31st December 2003, the Group had given £58,316m (2002: £52,427m) of its assets as collateral in respect of these transactions. Of the total collateral given £44,002m (2002: £35,573m) was on terms which gave the recipient the right to sell or repledge, comprising debt securities of £43,665m (2002: £33,729m) and equity securities of £337m (2002: £1,844m). The residual £14,314m (2002: £16,854m) was on terms by which the counterparty cannot sell or repledge comprised £14,024m (2002: £16,854m) of debt securities and £290m (2002: £nil) of equity securities.
For the pledge of collateral to secure on-balance sheet liabilities see Note 41.
(t) Provisions for bad and doubtful debtsDuring 2003, there was a net write-back of £nil (2002: £2m write-back, 2001: £9m charge) in respect of credit losses on derivatives. None of the year end specific provisions related to credit losses on derivatives (2002: £nil).
During 2003, there was a net write-back of £14m (2002: £nil, 2001: £nil) of the general provision in the respect of off-balance sheet exposures (including derivatives). At 31st December 2003, £nil of the general provision (2002: £14m) was held in respect of off-balance sheet exposures (including derivatives).
The specific provision for contingent liabilities and commitments is £12m (2002: £14m).
(u) GuaranteesAn element of Barclays normal banking business is to issue guarantees on behalf of its customers. In almost all cases, Barclays will hold collateral against the exposure, have a right of recourse to the customer or both. In addition, Barclays issues guarantees on its own behalf. The major categories of these guarantees are:
Financial guaranteesThese are given to banks and financial institutions on behalf of customers to secure loans, overdrafts and other banking facilities. These are commonly called facility guarantees.
Included within this category are stock borrowing indemnities. These relate to funds managed by Barclays on behalf of clients, which participate in stock lending programmes. Barclays indemnifies the clients against any losses incurred by the clients resulting from borrower default. Collateral, principally cash, is maintained against all stock borrowing transactions ranging from 102% to 105% of the securities loaned with adjustments to collateral made daily. It is possible that the exposure could exceed the collateral provided should the value of the security rise concurrently with the default of the borrowers.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 187
(u) Guarantees (continued)Standby letters of creditThese are irrevocable commitments to pay a third party, on behalf of our customers, the value of which on demand is subject to certain criteria being complied with. Any amounts paid are debited to the customers accounts. These contracts are used when required in substitution of guarantees due to a greater acceptability in the beneficiary country.
Other guaranteesThis category includes the following types of contracts:
Performance guarantees a guarantee given by the bank on behalf of a customer, undertaking to pay a certain sum if our customer has failed to carry out the terms or certain terms of the contract.
Advance payment guarantees enables the beneficiary to demand repayment of an advance in funds in certain circumstances.
Tender guarantees provided during a tender process to lend support to a customers commitment to a tender process.
Customs and Excise guarantees provided to HM Customs and Excise to cover a customers liability, most commonly for import duties.
Retention guarantees similar to advance payments but are used to secure early release of retained contract payments.
The following table provides the maturity analysis of guarantees issued by the Group. The amounts disclosed represent the maximum potential amount of future payments (undiscounted) the Group could be required to make under the guarantee, before any recovery through recourse or collaterisation provisions.
Credit card guaranteesUnder the Consumer Credit Act of 1974, Barclays may be liable to customers to refund payments made for unsatisfactory goods or services or unfulfilled contracts where payment was made through a credit card. The maximum liability that Barclays could have is the total credit limits marked to customers of £32,734m (2002: £29,208m). These limits are included within commitments with a maturity of less than one year, as the limit can be revoked at any time.
Warranties and indemnities given as part of acquisition and disposal activityWarranties and indemnities are routinely provided to counterparties as part of the terms and conditions required in a business acquisition, disposal or investing in joint ventures. Most commonly, these relate to indemnification against tax liabilities arising from pre-transaction activities. Usually the total liability in respect of warranties and indemnities for a transaction is capped and the maximum exposure under these is £4,000m (2002: £4,100m). No collateral or recourse to third parties is generally available.
Certain derivative contractsIn addition to the contracts described above, there are certain derivative contracts to which the Group is a counterparty that meet the characteristics of a guarantee under FIN 45. These derivatives are recorded in the Groups balance sheet at fair value under US GAAP.
Included in other provisions for liabilities and charges is £nil (2002: £4m) in respect of guarantees. The Group considers the amounts provided in the balance sheet represent a reasonable estimate of amounts actually anticipated to be paid under such arrangements.
(v) Total assetsThe adjustments to total assets arising from the GAAP differences dealt with in the tables on page 172, and Notes (p) and (q) amounted to £3,677m (2002: £6,202m). Additional adjustments arise due to further differences in GAAP, as set out below.
In accordance with ARB No. 43, Barclays PLC shares shown for UK GAAP within Other assets in Note 23 have been netted against US GAAP shareholders equity.
188
(v) Total assets (continued)NettingCertain transactions have been netted in the UK as required under FRS 5. To the extent these arrangements do not satisfy the requirement of FIN 39 and FIN 41, total assets have been increased by £45,277m (2002: £43,216m).
Gross assets and liabilities have been increased by £49,099m (2002: £36,541m) due to inclusion of certain BGI insurance products. The legal form of these products is similar to insurance contracts, which are accounted for in accordance with SFAS 97. Accordingly, the assets and liabilities associated with these products are recorded on the balance sheet.
The inclusion of acceptances resulted in an increase in total assets under US GAAP of £654m (2002: £2,588m).
(w) Profit and loss account presentationThere are certain differences in the presentation of the profit and loss account between UK GAAP and US GAAP. Profits or losses on disposal of Group undertakings (2003: £4m profit, 2002: £3m loss, 2001: £4m loss) would be classified as operating income or expense under US GAAP rather than being shown separately. Under US GAAP, net interest received (2003: £68m, 2002: £75m, 2001: £387m paid) relating to trading activities would be shown within net interest revenue, rather than included in dealing profits. Reconciling differences arising from associated undertakings (2003: £7m profit, 2002: £6m profit, 2001: £nil) would be included within a single component of net income.
(x) Changes in UK GAAPDuring 2003, Barclays restated the 2002 shareholders funds under UK GAAP in respect of changes of accounting policy for the purchase and sales of own shares, as required by UITF 37, as described on page 105. The restatement had no impact on net income. There has been no effect on the reported US GAAP figures.
Shareholders funds
62 Consolidated statement of cash flows
Interest paid in the year, including amounts relating to trading activities, was £10,768m (2002: £10,167m, 2001: £13,319m).
For the purposes for the US GAAP cash flow, cash and cash equivalents are defined as short-term highly liquid investments which are readily convertible into known amounts of cash with original maturity of three months.
Set out below, for illustrative purposes, is a summary consolidated statement of cash flows presented on a US GAAP basis:
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 189
63 Regulatory capital requirements
Capital adequacy and the use of regulatory capital are monitored by the Group, employing techniques based on the guidelines developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Regulations and Supervisory Practices (the Basel Committee) and European Community Directives, as implemented by the Financial Services Authority (FSA) for supervisory purposes. The FSA regards the risk asset ratio calculation, originally developed by the Basel Committee, as a key supervisory tool and sets individual minimum ratio requirements for banks in the UK at or above the minimum of 8%. The concept of risk weighting and the basis for calculating eligible capital resources are described under capital ratios on page 88.
The following tables summarises capital resources and capital ratios, as defined for supervisory purposes:
Barclays PLC Group and Barclays Bank PLC Group
64 Significant Group concentration of credit risk
A concentration of credit risk is defined as existing when a number of counterparties are engaged in similar activities and have similar economic characteristics that would cause their ability to meet contractual obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic or other conditions.
Barclays has three significant concentrations of exposures to credit risk: to the UK economy, to home loans, and to banks and other financial institutions.
Credit exposure is concentrated in the UK where the majority of the Groups activities are conducted. Gross credit exposure to borrowers on the banking book in the UK (based on the location of the office recording the transaction) was £143,809m at 31st December 2003 (2002: £135,900m). In the UK the Groups collateral policy differs by line of business and product, but is broadly in line with UK market practice (see also below). It enters into netting agreements with counterparties in wholesale markets whenever practical and to the extent that such agreements are enforceable in law.
Lending in respect of home loans to customers in the UK and the rest of Europe totalled £72,159m at 31st December 2003 (2002: £64,679m). This represents 42% (2002: 40%) of the total banking book lending to customers. Elsewhere they were insignificant. As collateral, Barclays requires a first mortgage over the residential property for the acquisition of which the loan is made.
As an active participant in the international banking markets, the Group has significant credit exposure to banks and other financial institutions. In total, credit risk exposure to financial institutions at 31st December 2003 was estimated to have amounted to £87bn (2002: £87bn) of which £62bn (2002: £60bn) consisted of loans and advances to banks and £9bn (2002: £10bn) of mark to market balances in respect of derivatives. The remaining credit risk exposure is largely related to letters of credit and guarantees. The Group may require collateral before entering into exposure to a bank, depending on the nature of the product or type of exposure and the bank involved. The Groups policy is to enter into netting agreements with other banks whenever possible and to the extent that such agreements are enforceable in law.
The concentrations of credit exposure described above are not proportionally related to credit loss. Some segments of the Groups portfolio have and are expected to have proportionally higher credit charges in relation to the exposure than others. Moreover, the volatility of credit loss is different in different parts of the portfolio. Thus it is possible that comparatively large credit charges could arise in parts of the portfolio not mentioned above.
190
65 Ratio of earnings to fixed charges and preference share dividends
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 191
SEC Form 20-F Cross Reference and Other Information
192
SEC Form 20-F Cross Reference and Other InformationCurrency of Presentation
Currency of Presentation
In this report, unless otherwise specified, all amounts are expressed in pounds Sterling. For the months indicated, the high and low noon buying rates in New York City for cable transfers in pounds Sterling, as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (the noon buying rate), were:
For the years indicated, the average of the noon buying rates on the last day of each month were:
On 26th February 2004, the noon buying rate was US$1.86 per pound Sterling. No representation is made that pounds Sterling amounts have been, or could have been, or could be, converted into US Dollars at that rate or at any of the above rates. For the purpose of presenting financial information in this report, exchange rates other than those shown above may have been used.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 193
SEC Form 20-F Cross Reference and Other InformationGlossary
Glossary
194
Barclays Bank PLC Data
The Note numbers refer to the Notes on pages 114 to 191, whereas the Note letters refer to those on pages 201 to 202.
The consolidated profit and loss account of Barclays Bank PLC for the year ended 31st December 2003, contains a charge of £nil (2002: £2m, 2001: £2m) within staff costs that is debited directly to reserves in the consolidated accounts of Barclays PLC. The amounts in respect of administration expenses staff costs, other staff costs, and all related profit and loss items, including profit retained for the financial year on pages 70 to 95 are for Barclays PLC. These amounts should be debited by £nil to reflect those for Barclays Bank PLC (2002: £2m, 2001: £2m).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 195
Barclays Bank PLC DataStatement of Total Recognised Gains and Losses
196
Barclays Bank PLC DataConsolidated Balance Sheet
The Note numbers refer to the Notes on pages 114 to 191.
Equity shares and shareholders funds for Barclays Bank PLC differ from Barclays PLC by £12m (2002: £4m). As a result related balances in Note 18, Note 40, Note 45 and Note 59 differ for Barclays Bank PLC by the same amounts.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 197
Equity shares and shareholders funds for Barclays Bank PLC differ from Barclays PLC by £12m (2002:£4m). As a result related balances in Note 18, Note 40, Note 45 and Note 59 differ for Barclays Bank PLC by the same amounts.
198
Barclays Bank PLC DataConsolidated Statement of Changes in Reserves
Consolidated statement of changes in reservesAs at 31st December 2003
The Group operates in a number of countries subject to regulations under which a local subsidiary undertaking has to maintain a minimum level of capital. The current policy of the Group is that local capital requirements are met, as far as possible, by the retention of profit. Certain countries operate exchange control regulations which limit the amount of dividends that can be remitted to non-resident shareholders. It is not possible to determine the amount of profit retained and other reserves that is restricted by these regulations, but the net profit retained of overseas subsidiaries, associated undertakings and joint ventures at 31st December 2003 totalled £925m (2002: £1,038m, 2001: £1,149m). If such overseas reserves were to be remitted, other tax liabilities, which have not been provided for in the accounts, might arise.
Accumulated exchange rate translation differences are £520m debit (2002: £491m debit, 2001: £430m debit).
Goodwill amounting to £205m (2002: £205m, 2001: £215m) has been charged directly against reserves in the current and prior years in respect of acquisitions. This amount is net of any goodwill attributable to subsidiary undertakings disposed of prior to the balance sheet date.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 199
Barclays Bank PLC DataConsolidated Cash Flow Statement
200
Barclays Bank PLC DataNotes to the Accounts
(a) Administrative expenses staff costs
(b) Called up share capital
Ordinary sharesThe authorised ordinary share capital of the Bank, as at 31st December 2003, was 3,000m (2002: 3,000m) ordinary shares of £1 each.
Preference sharesThe authorised preference share capital of the Bank is 150m (2002: 150m) shares of US$0.01 each. There are no preference shares outstanding as at 31st December 2003 (2002: nil).
(c) Dividends
These dividends are paid to enable Barclays PLC to fund its dividends to its shareholders and, in 2003, to fund the repurchase by Barclays PLC of ordinary share capital at a total cost of £204m (2002: total cost of £546m), and to fund contributions of £36m (2002: £46m) made by Barclays PLC to the QUEST (see page 111) to enable the purchase of new Barclays PLC ordinary shares on the exercise of options under the SAYE Share Option Scheme.
Series D1 and Series D2 preference shares were redeemed on 29th March 2001. Dividends paid in respect of these preference shares were US$7m (£5m) in 2001.
(d) Reconciliation of operating profit to net cash flow from operating activities
The detailed movements disclosed in Note 48 differ for Barclays Bank PLC in the following respects; net increase in debt securities and equity shares by £8m (2002: £4m) and other non-cash movements by £(8)m (2002: £(4)m).
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 201
(e) Changes in financing during the year
(f) Segmental analysis
(g) Differences between UK and US accounting principles Barclays Bank PLC
The following table summarises the significant adjustments to consolidated attributable profit (net income under US GAAP) and shareholders funds (shareholders equity under US GAAP) which would result from the application of US GAAP instead of UK GAAP.
The Notes refer to those parts of Note 61 on pages 173 to 189.
202
Barclays Bank PLC DataFinancial Data
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 203
US GAAP Financial Data
The following financial information has been adjusted from data prepared under UK GAAP to reflect significant differences from accounting principles generally accepted in the US (US GAAP). See Note 61 for an explanation of these differences.
Selected financial statement data
204
Reconciliation of Economic Profit
Reconciliation of economic profit
Economic profit for 2003 was £1.4bn, which, added to the £3.9bn generated between 2000-2002 inclusive, delivered a cumulative total of £5.3bn for the 2000-2003 goal period.
The 2000-2003 breakdown of economic profit performance is shown below and its reconciliation to profit after tax and minority interests.
The difference between the average shareholders funds (excluding minority interests) and that reported above represents cumulative goodwill amortisation charged and goodwill previously written off to reserves.
The cost of average shareholders funds includes a charge for purchased goodwill. A post-tax cost of equity of 8.5% has been used for goodwill associated with the acquisition of Woolwich plc. A post-tax cost of equity of 9.5% (2002: 9.5%, 2001: 10.5%, 2000: 11.0%) has been used for all other goodwill.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 205
Shareholder Information
Dividends on the ordinary shares of Barclays PLC
Barclays PLC has paid dividends on its ordinary shares every year without interruption since its incorporation in 1896.
The dividends declared for each of the last five years were:
Pence per 25p ordinary share
US Dollars per 25p ordinary share
The gross dividends applicable to an American Depositary Share (ADS) representing four ordinary shares, before deduction of withholding tax, but including the UK imputed tax credit for dividends paid before 6th April 1999 (see Taxation of US holders (page 211)) are as follows.
US Dollars per American Depositary Share
Dividends expressed in Dollars are translated at the noon buying rates in New York City for cable transfers in pounds Sterling as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (the noon buying rate) for the days on which dividends are paid, except for the 2003 final dividend, payable in the UK on 30th April 2004, which is translated at noon buying rate applicable on 26th February 2004, the latest practical date for inclusion in this report. No representation is made that pounds Sterling amounts have been, or could have been, or could be, converted into Dollars at these rates.
206
Trading Market for Ordinary Shares of Barclays PLC
The principal trading market for Barclays PLC ordinary shares is the London Stock Exchange. Ordinary share listings were also obtained on the Tokyo Stock Exchange with effect from 1st August 1986 and the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) with effect from 9th September 1986.
Trading on the NYSE is in the form of ADSs under the symbol BCS. Each ADS represents four 25p ordinary shares and is evidenced by an American Depositary Receipt (ADR). The ADR depositary is The Bank of New York. Details of trading activity are published in the stock tables of leading daily newspapers in the US.
There were 229 ADR holders and 890 recorded holders of ordinary shares with US addresses at 31st December 2003, whose shareholdings represented approximately 1.71% of total outstanding ordinary shares on that date. Since certain of the ordinary shares and ADRs were held by brokers or other nominees, the number of recorded holders in the US may not be representative of the number of beneficial holders or of their country of residence.
The following table shows the high and low sales prices for the ordinary shares of 25p during the periods indicated, based on mid-market prices at close of business on the London Stock Exchange and the high and low sale prices for ADSs as reported on the NYSE composite tape.
From 29th January 2001, decimal pricing was introduced for trading on the NYSE.
The high and low prices for 25p ordinary shares and American depositary shares in January 2004 were 536p and 495p and US$39.43 and US$36.20 respectively.
This section incorporates information on the prices at which securities of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC have traded. It is emphasised that past performance cannot be relied upon as a guide to future performance.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 207
Shareholdings at 31st December 2003(a)
208
Memorandum andArticles of Association
The Company was incorporated in England and Wales on 20th July 1896 under the Companies Acts 1862 to 1890 as a company limited by shares and was re-registered in 1982 as a public limited company under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1980. The Company is registered under company number 48839. The Company was re-registered as Barclays PLC on 1st January 1985.
The objects of the Company are set out in full in clause 4 of its Memorandum of Association which provides, among other things, that the Companys objects are to carry on the business of an investment and holding company in all respects.
DirectorsA Director may not vote or count towards the quorum on any resolution concerning any proposal in which he (or any person connected with him) has a material interest (other than by virtue of his interest in securities of the Company) or if he has a duty which conflicts or may conflict with the interests of the Company, unless the resolution relates to any proposal:
(i) to indemnify a Director in respect of any obligation incurred for the benefit of the Company (or any other member of the Group);
(ii) to indemnify a third party in respect of any obligation for which the Director has personally assumed responsibility;
(iii) to indemnify a Director for any liability which he may incur in the performance of his duties or to obtain insurance against such a liability;
(iv) involving the acquisition by a Director of any securities of the Company pursuant to an offer to existing holders of securities or to the public;
(v) that the Director underwrite any issue of securities of the Company (or any of its subsidiaries);
(vi) concerning any other company in which the Director is interested as an officer or creditor or shareholder, but only if he owns less than 1% of either the issued equity share capital or of the voting rights of that company;
(vii) concerning any superannuation fund or retirement, death or disability benefits scheme or employees share scheme, so long as any such fund or scheme does not give additional advantages to the Directors which are not granted to the employees who are in the fund or scheme; and
(viii) concerning any other arrangement for the benefit of employees of the Company or any other member of the Group under which the Director benefits in a similar manner to the employees concerned and which does not give the Director any advantage which the employees to whom the arrangement relates would not receive.
A Director may not vote or be counted in the quorum on any resolution which concerns his own employment with the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested.
The Directors may exercise all the powers of the Company to borrow money.
A Director must retire from office at the conclusion of the first annual general meeting after he reaches the age of 70. He is however, eligible to stand for re-election at that meeting.
A Director is required to hold an interest in ordinary shares having a nominal value of at least £500. A Director may act before acquiring those shares but must acquire the qualification shares within two months after his or her appointment.
At each annual general meeting one-third of the Directors for the time being (rounded down if necessary) are required to retire from office.
Classes of shareThe Company has two classes of shares, ordinary shares and staff shares, to which the provisions set out below apply.
(a) DividendsUnder English law, dividends are payable on the Companys ordinary shares only out of profits available for distribution, as determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the UK and by the Companies Act 1985. The Company in general meeting may declare dividends by ordinary resolution, but such dividend may not exceed the amount recommended by the Directors. The Directors may pay interim or final dividends if it appears they are justified by the Companys financial position.
The profits which are resolved to be distributed in respect of any financial period are applied first in payment of a fixed dividend of 20% per annum on the staff shares and then in payment of dividends on the ordinary shares.
If a dividend is not claimed after 12 years of it becoming payable, it is forfeited and reverts to the Company.
The Directors may, with the approval of an ordinary resolution of the Company, offer shareholders the right to chose to receive an allotment of new ordinary shares credited as fully paid instead of cash in respect of all or part of any dividend.
(b) VotingEvery member who is present in person or represented at any general meeting of the Company and who is entitled to vote has one vote on a show of hands. On a poll, every member who is present or represented has one vote for every share held.
If any sum remains unpaid in relation to a members shareholding, that member is not entitled to vote that share unless the Board otherwise determines.
If any member, or any other person appearing to be interested in any shares in the Company, is served with a notice under Section 212 of the Companies Act 1985 and does not supply the Company with the information required in the notice, then the Board, in its absolute discretion, may direct that that member shall not be entitled to attend or vote at any meeting of the Company.
(c) LiquidationIn the event of any return of capital on liquidation the ordinary shares and the staff shares rank equally in proportion to the amounts paid up or credited as paid up on the shares of each class, except that in the event of a winding up of the Company the holders of the staff shares are only entitled to participate in the surplus assets available for distribution up to the amount paid up on the staff shares plus 10%.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 209
(d) Redemption provisionsSubject to the Companies Act 1985, any share may be issued on terms that it is, at the option of the Company or the holder of such share, redeemable. The Company has no redeemable shares in issue.
(e) Calls on capitalThe Directors may make calls upon the members in respect of any monies unpaid on their shares. A person upon whom a call is made remains liable even if the shares in respect of which the call is made have been transferred.
(f) Variation of rightsThe rights attached to any class of shares may be varied with the sanction of an extraordinary resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the shares of that class.
Annual and extraordinary general meetingsThe Company is required to hold a general meeting each year as its annual general meeting in addition to other meetings (called extraordinary general meetings) as the Directors think fit. The type of the meeting will be specified in the notice calling it. Not more than 15 months may elapse between the date of one annual general meeting and the next.
In the case of an annual general meeting or a meeting for the passing of a special resolution (requiring the consent of a 75% majority) 21 clear days notice is required. In other cases 14 clear days notice is required. The notice must specify the place, the date and the hour of the meeting, and the general nature of the business to be transacted.
Subject as noted in (b) above, all shareholders are entitled to attend and vote at general meetings. The articles of association do, however, provide that arrangements may be made for simultaneous attendance at a general meeting at a place other than that specified in the notice of meeting, in which case some shareholders may be excluded from the specified place.
Limitations on foreign shareholdersThere are no limitations imposed by English law or the Companys memorandum or articles of association on the right of non-residents or foreign persons to hold or vote the Companys ordinary shares other than the limitations that would generally apply to all of the Companys shareholders.
Taxation
The following is a summary of the principal tax consequences for holders of ordinary shares of Barclays PLC, preference shares of the Bank, ADSs representing such ordinary shares or preference shares, who are citizens or residents of the UK or US, or otherwise who are subject to UK tax or US federal income tax on a net income basis in respect of such securities, that own the shares or ADSs as capital assets for tax purposes. It is not, however, a comprehensive analysis of all the potential tax consequences for such holders, and it does not discuss the tax consequences of members of special classes of holders subject to special rules or holders that, directly or indirectly, hold 10% or more of Barclays voting stock. Investors are advised to consult their tax advisers regarding the tax implications of their particular holdings, including the consequences under applicable state and local law, and in particular whether they are eligible for the benefits of the Old Treaty and/or the New Treaty, as defined below.
A US holder is a beneficial owner of shares or ADSs that is for US federal income tax purposes (i) a citizen or resident of the US, (ii) a US domestic corporation, (iii) an estate whose income is subject to US federal income tax regardless of its source, or (iv) a trust if a US court can exercise primary supervision over the trusts administration and one or more US persons are authorised to control all substantial decisions of the trust.
Unless otherwise noted, the statements of tax laws set out below are based on the tax laws of the UK in force as at 12th February 2004 and are subject to any subsequent changes in UK law, in particular any announcements made in the Chancellors UK Budget on the 17th March 2004. This section is also based on the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations, published rulings and court decisions (the Code), and on the Double Taxation Convention between the UK and the US as entered into force in 1980 (the Old Treaty) and the Double Taxation Convention between the UK and the US that was ratified in March 2003 (the New Treaty), all of which are subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis.
Generally, the New Treaty is effective in respect of taxes withheld at source for amounts paid or credited on or after 1st May 2003. Other provisions of the New Treaty, however, took effect for UK tax purposes for individuals on 6th April 2003 (1st April 2003 for UK companies) and took effect for US federal income tax purposes on 1st January 2004. The rules of the Old Treaty remain applicable until these effective dates. A taxpayer may in any case elect to have the Old Treaty apply in its entirety for a period of 12 months after the applicable effective dates of the New Treaty.
This section is based in part upon the representations of the ADR Depositary and the assumption that each obligation of the Deposit Agreement and any related agreement will be performed in accordance with its terms.
For purposes of the Old Treaty, the New Treaty, the estate and gift tax convention (the Estate Tax Convention) and for the purposes of the Code, the holders of ADRs evidencing ADSs will be treated as owners of the underlying ordinary shares or preference shares, as the case may be. Generally, exchanges of shares for ADRs, and ADRs for shares, will not be subject to US federal income tax or to UK tax, other than stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax, as described below.
210
Taxation of UK holdersTaxation of dividendsIn accordance with UK law, Barclays PLC and the Bank pay dividends on ordinary shares and preference shares without any deduction or withholding tax in respect of any taxes imposed by the UK government or any UK taxing authority.
If the shareholder is a UK resident individual liable to income tax only at the basic rate or the lower rate, then there will be no further tax liability in respect of the dividend received. If, however, the individual shareholder is subject to income tax at the higher rate (currently 40%), there will be a further liability to tax. Higher rate taxpayers are taxable on dividend income at a special rate of (currently 32.5%) against which can be offset a tax credit of one-ninth of the dividend paid. Tax credits are no longer repayable to shareholders with no tax liability.
Taxation of shares under the Dividend Reinvestment PlanWhere a shareholder elects to purchase shares using their cash dividend, the individual will be liable for income tax on dividends reinvested in the Plan on the same basis as if they had received the cash and arranged the investment themselves. They should accordingly include the dividend received in their annual tax return in the normal way. The tax consequences for a UK individual are the same as described in Taxation of dividends above.
Taxation of capital gainsWhere shares are disposed of by open market sale, a capital gain may result if the disposal proceeds exceed the sum of the base cost of the shares sold and any other allowable deductions such as share dealing costs, indexation relief (up to 5th April 1998) and taper relief (generally on shares held at 16th March 1998 and subsequent acquisitions). To arrive at the total base cost of any Barclays PLC shares held, the amount subscribed for rights taken up in 1985 and 1988 must be added to the cost of all other shares held. For this purpose, current legislation permits the market valuation at 31st March 1982 to be substituted for the original cost of shares purchased before that date.
The calculations required to compute chargeable capital gains, particularly taper and indexation reliefs, may be complex. Capital gains may also arise from the gifting of shares to connected parties such as relatives (although not spouses) and family trusts. Shareholders are advised to consult their personal financial adviser if further information regarding a possible tax liability in respect of their holdings of Barclays PLC shares is required.
Stamp dutyOn the purchase of shares, stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax at the rate of 0.5% is normally payable on the purchase price of the shares.
Inheritance taxAn individual may be liable to inheritance tax on the transfer of ordinary shares or preference shares. Where an individual is liable, inheritance tax may be charged on the amount by which the value of his or her estate is reduced as a result of any transfer by way of gift or other gratuitous transaction made by them or treated as made by them.
Taxation of US holdersTaxation of dividendsA US holder is subject to US federal income taxation on the gross amount of any dividend paid by Barclays out of its current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for US federal income tax purposes). Dividends paid to a non-corporate US holder in taxable years beginning after 31st December 2002 and before 1st January 2009 that constitute qualified dividend income will be taxable to the holder at a maximum tax rate of 15%, provided that the holder has a holding period of the shares or ADSs of more than 60 days during the 120-day period beginning 60 days before the ex-dividend date and meets other holding period requirements. On 19th February 2004, the IRS announced that it will permit taxpayers to apply a proposed legislative change to the holding period requirement described in the preceding sentence as if such change were already effective. This legislative technical correction would change the minimum required holding period, retroactive to 1st January 2003, to more than 60 days during the 121-day period beginning 60 days before the ex-dividend date. Dividends paid by Barclays with respect to the shares or ADSs will generally be qualified dividend income.
Under the Old Treaty, a US holder entitled to its benefits is entitled to a tax credit from the UK Inland Revenue equal to the amount of the tax credit available to a shareholder resident in the United Kingdom (i.e. one-ninth of the dividend received), but the amount of the dividend plus the amount of the refund are also subject to withholding in an amount equal to the amount of the tax credit. A US holder that is eligible for the benefits of the Old Treaty may include in the gross amount of the dividend the UK tax deemed withheld from the dividend payment pursuant to the Old Treaty. Subject to certain limitations, the UK tax withheld in accordance with the Old Treaty and effectively paid over to the UK Inland Revenue will be creditable against the US holders US federal income tax liability, provided the US holder is eligible for the benefits of the Old Treaty and has properly filed Internal Revenue Form 8833. Special rules apply in determining the foreign tax credit limitation with respect to dividends that are subject to the maximum 15% tax rate.
Under the New Treaty, a US holder will not be entitled to a UK tax credit, but will also not be subject to UK withholding tax. The US holder will include in gross income for US federal income tax purposes only the amount of the dividend actually received from Barclays, and the receipt of a dividend will not entitle the US holder to a foreign tax credit.
Dividends must be included in income when the US holder, in the case of shares, or the Depositary, in the case of ADSs, actually or constructively receives the dividend, and will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to US corporations in respect of dividends received from other US corporations. Dividends will be income from sources outside the US, and will generally be passive income or financial services income, which is treated separately from other types of income for the purposes of computing any allowable foreign tax credit.
The amount of the dividend distribution will be the US Dollar value of the pound Sterling payments made, determined at the spot Pound Sterling/US Dollar rate on the date the dividend distribution is includable in income, regardless of whether the payment is in fact converted into US Dollars. Generally, any gain or loss resulting from currency exchange fluctuations during the period from the date the dividend payment is includable in income to the date the payment is converted into US Dollars will be treated as ordinary income or loss and, for foreign tax credit limitation purposes, from sources within the US.
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 211
Distributions in excess of Barclays current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined for US federal income tax purposes, will be treated as a return of capital to the extent of the US holders basis in the shares or ADSs and thereafter as capital gain.
Taxation of capital gainsGenerally, US holders will not be subject to UK tax, but will be subject to US tax on capital gains realised on the sale or other disposition of ordinary shares, preference shares or ADSs. Capital gain of a non-corporate US holder that is recognised on or after 6th May 2003 and before 1st January 2009 is generally taxed at a maximum rate of 15% where the holder has a holding period of greater than one year.
Taxation of premium on redemption or purchase of sharesNo refund of tax will be available under the Old Treaty or the New Treaty in respect of any premium paid on a redemption of preference shares by the Bank or on a purchase by Barclays PLC of its own shares. For US tax purposes, redemption premium generally will be treated as an additional amount realised in the calculation of gain or loss.
Stamp dutyNo UK stamp duty is payable on the transfer of an ADS, provided that the separate instrument of transfer is not executed in, and remains at all times outside, the UK.
Estate and gift taxUnder the Estate Tax Convention, a US holder generally is not subject to UK inheritance tax.
Exchange Controls and Other LimitationsAffecting Security Holders
Other than certain emergency restrictions which may be in force from time to time, there are currently no UK laws, decrees or regulations which would affect the transfer of capital or remittance of dividends, interest and other payments to holders of Barclays securities who are not residents of the UK. There are also no restrictions under the Articles of Association of either Barclays PLC or the Bank, or under current UK laws, which limit the right of non-resident or foreign owners, to hold Barclays securities or, when entitled to vote, to do so.
Documents on Display
It is possible to read and copy documents that have been filed by Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC with the US Securities and Exchange Commission at the US Securities and Exchange Commissions public reference room located at 450 5th Street, NW, Washington, DC20549. Please call the US Securities and Exchange Commission at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the public reference rooms and their copy charges. Filings with the US Securities and Exchange Commission are also available to the public from commercial document retrieval services, and in the website maintained by the SEC at www.sec.gov.
Shareholder Enquiries
Investors who have any questions about their investment in Barclays, or about Barclays in general, may write to:
Head of Investor RelationsBarclays PLC54 Lombard StreetLondon EC3P 3AH
or, in the United States of America,
The Corporate Communications DepartmentBarclays Bank PLC222 BroadwayNew York, NY 10038, USA
Registered and Head office:54 Lombard StreetLondon EC3P 3AHTel: 020 7699 5000
Registrar:The Registrar to Barclays PLCThe CausewayWorthingBN99 6DATel: 0870 609 4535E-mail: questions@share-registers.co.uk
ADR Depositary:The Bank of New YorkPO Box 11258Church Street StationNew YorkNY 10286-1258Tel: 1-888-BNY-ADRS (toll-free for US domestic callers)or 610 312 5315E-mail: shareowner-svcs@bankofny.com
212
Group Senior Management and Principal Offices
Group SeniorManagement andPrincipal Offices
Sir Peter Middleton GCB ChairmanMatthew Barrett Group Chief ExecutiveJohn Varley Group Deputy Chief Executive
Allan Barr Director, Barclays SolutionsGraham Brammer Group Property Services DirectorToby Broome Director, Service and Supplier ManagementLeigh Bruce Group Communications DirectorMark Carawan Director, Group Internal AuditJohn Charters Group Non-Financial Risk DirectorJohn Cotton Canary Wharf Programme DirectorMike Davis Director of Public PolicyColette Delaney-Smith Chief Operating Officer, Group Risk
Gary Dibb Group Chief Administrative OfficerLawrence Dickinson Group SecretaryJohn Gilbert Finance and Business Risk Director, Group FunctionsPeter Goshawk Group TreasurerSimon Gulliford Group Marketing DirectorMark Harding Group General CounselBrian Harte Group Compliance OfficerNaguib Kheraj Group Finance DirectorRobert Le Blanc Group Financial Risk DirectorKathy Lisson Director of Operational TransformationKevin Lloyd Group Chief Technology OfficerIan Menzies-Conacher Group Taxation DirectorMark Merson Group Financial ControllerRobert Nimmo Group Risk DirectorJohn Ott Group Director, Strategy and PlanningDavid Postings Managing Director, EnableValerie Scoular Group Human Resources DirectorCathy Turner Head of Investor RelationsColin Walklin Director, Group FinanceDavid Weymouth Chief Information Officer
Roger Davis Chief Executive OfficerJayne Almond* Managing Director, Home FinanceWai Au Chief Operating OfficerAlistair Camp* Managing Director, Medium Business & Agriculture CustomersRobin Dickie* Managing Director, Personal CustomersSimon Gulliford Group Marketing & Communications DirectorClaire Hafner Finance DirectorPeter Harvey* Managing Director, Larger Business CustomersFrederic Nze Managing Director, ProductsMike Rogers* Managing Director, Small Business and Premier CustomersJohn Sands Human Resources DirectorAndy Simmonds Risk DirectorDavid Weymouth Chief Information Officer
David Roberts Chief Executive OfficerJon Anderson Finance DirectorBob Bashford Risk DirectorJohn Eaton Chief Operating OfficerAllan Fielder Human Resources Director
Private ClientsRay Greenshields* Managing Director, Investment ManagementCatherine McDowell* Managing Director, International BankingMike Pedersen* Managing Director, Private Banking
InternationalDominic Bruynseels* Managing Director, AfricaJacobo Gonzalez-Robatto* Managing Director, Iberia and Country Manager, SpainPascal Roché* Managing Director, FranceRui Semedo* Country Manager, PortugalColin Vincent* Country Manager, Italy
Gary Hoffman Chief Executive OfficerPeter Crook* Managing Director UK Consumer FinanceDavid Curd Director, IT and OperationsMark Evans* Managing Director, Barclaycard CorporatePeter Herbert* Managing Director, Barclaycard InternationalAlison Hutchinson Marketing DirectorRichard Sommers Finance DirectorSue Turner Director, Human Resources
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 213
Barclays Capital5 The North Colonnade,Canary WharfLondon E14 4BBTel: 020 7623 2323
Robert E Diamond Jr. Chief Executive OfficerPatrick Clackson Chief Financial OfficerHans-Joerg Rudloff ChairmanJerry del Missier* Global Head of Rates and Private Equity and Chief Executive, Continental EuropePaul Idzik Chief Operating OfficerRoger Jenkins* Global Head of Structured Capital MarketsThomas L Kalaris Global Head of Distribution and Research and Chief Executive, AmericasGrant Kvalheim* Global Head of Investment Banking and Credit ProductsRobert Morrice Chairman and Chief Executive, Asia Pacific
Robert E. Diamond, Jr. ChairmanBlake Grossman Global Co-Chief Executive OfficerAndrew Skirton Global Co-Chief Executive OfficerRichard Ricci Chief Operating OfficerFrank Ryan Chief Financial OfficerLindsay Tomlinson Vice-Chairman, Europe
Thulisizwe Johnson Managing Director
Colin Plowman Managing Director
Nicholas Johnson Chief Executive Officer
Pascal Roché Managing Director
Dr Rainer Stephan Managing Director
Kobina Quansah Managing Director
Tim Streatfeild-James Gibraltar Director
Robert Morrice Chairman and Chief Executive, Asia Pacific
Mani Subramanian Chief Executive Officer
Tom McAleese Managing Director
Colin Vincent Country Manager
Jeffrey Deck Chief Executive Officer
*Strategic Business Unit head
214
Adan Mohamed Managing Director
Enrique Arias Deputy Chief Executive Officer
Jacques de Navacelle Managing Director
Rui Semedo Country Manager
Frank Hoareau Managing Director
Quek Suan Kiat Branch Manager
Isaac Takawira Country Managing Director
Jin Sool Joo Managing Director
Jacobo González-Robatto Managing Director, Private Clients & International Iberia and Country ManagerPedro Santaella Managing Director, Barclays Capital
Michael Morley Chief Executive Officer
Karl Stumke Managing Director
Thomas L Kalaris Chief Executive
Blake Grossman Co-Chief ExecutiveAndrew Skirton Co-Chief Executive
Frank Griffiths Managing Director
Mark Petchell Managing Director
Margaret Mwanakatwe Managing Director
Alexander Jongwe Managing Director
Barclays PLC Annual Report 2003 215
Signatures
The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.
ITEM 19: EXHIBIT INDEX 2003
EXHIBIT INDEX